JP2018075420A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing opportunities to execute a continuous performance.SOLUTION: Stationary symbols to be displayed on a display screen of a third symbol display device 81 comprise, for example, three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1-Z3, and after starting high-speed variation, the respective symbol rows Z1-Z3 are stationarily displayed one row by one row in order of the upper row → the lower low → the middle row. Even when the variation performance is started and the stationary display of the upper symbol row Z1 as a part of the stationary symbols is started, if the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are currently under high-speed variation, a performance control device 117 may substitute other symbol rows for the respective symbol rows Z2 and Z3 under the high-speed variation to change the stationary symbols under the variation performance into "chance outcomes". Consequently, this configuration can increase opportunities to execute the continuous chance outcome performance more than a case where, only when all of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are under the high-speed variation, the stationary symbol of variation performance is changed into "chance outcomes".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.

  In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, when a plurality of variation effects to be started are reserved when a game ball wins a start opening, this continuous effect is performed for the plurality of variation effects held.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, in order to perform a continuous effect, there are two or more reserved variable effects, so there is a problem that a continuous effect cannot be performed when only one variable effect is reserved.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing opportunities for performing a continuous performance.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects a display means for displaying identification information, a entrance into which a game medium enters, and an entrance of the game medium into the entrance. A detection means, a peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means when the detection means detects a ball entering a game medium, and controls the peripheral control means, Main control means for performing control, and the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information for acquiring the entrance information associated with the entrance The lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance, and the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means, the entrance information acquisition means, and the lottery information acquisition means Send to peripheral control means Selection information transmission means, entrance information storage means for storing entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the control means, and the peripheral control means includes a plurality of pieces of identification information when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. The dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of the identification information constituted by the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means After the aspect is changed to an aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information, a stop display execution means for stopping and displaying the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically on the display means, and a lottery of the main control means Affection The lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information transmitted by the transmitting means, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, the stop display executing means displays a part of the plurality of identification information as a stop display or the If a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display executing means, the identification information dynamically displayed in the difficult to recognize manner by the dynamic display executing means Changeable determination means for determining whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the information, and the dynamic display executing means when the changeable determination means determines that the change is possible A first changing unit that changes the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode to a predetermined mode, and the stop of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first change unit. Control is performed so that the predetermined mode is selected as the stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means when the stop display is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed. 2 changing means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the dynamic display execution means is instructed to execute dynamic display of identification information by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. In addition, first to nth (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2) identification information sequence in which a plurality of identification information is connected is dynamically displayed on the display unit in units of identification information sequence, and the first to nth The identification information stop display mode is the predetermined mode when the same identification information is included and stopped in each of the identification information strings, and the stop display execution means is the dynamic display execution means. After the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the above, the first to nth identification information sequences are stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences, and the change The acceptability judging means uses the lottery information receiving means. When selection information is received, if the dynamic display execution means has executed the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence in a difficult-to-recognize manner, the identification information stop-display manner is set to a predetermined manner. It is determined that the change is possible, and the first change unit identifies the second to nth items that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit when it is determined that the change is possible by the change possibility determination unit. The stop display mode of the information string is changed to a predetermined mode.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the change permission determination means includes the same identification information in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. Identification information determining means for determining whether the first to (n-1) th identification information strings are identical to each other when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means. If it is determined that information is present and the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence in a difficult-to-recognize manner, the identification information stop-display manner is changed to a predetermined manner. When it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the second change unit stops the display of the n-th identification information sequence that is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit. Change the mode to the predetermined mode It is.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the (n-1) -th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable form for the dynamic display of the identification information. A first dynamic display capable of executing a changing process for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means after the display until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The changing process by the first changing unit from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A second dynamic display that is not executable, and the dynamic display execution means executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and The change possibility determination means is the same as the stop display mode of each identification information sequence from the first to the (n-1) th. Identification information determining means for determining whether or not the identification information exists, and when the lottery information receiving means receives the lottery information, each identification from the first to the (n−1) th identification by the identification information determining means If it is determined that the same identification information exists in the information string and the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Is.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the detection means detects the entry of the game medium, the main control means acquires the entry information associated with the entry by the entry information acquisition means, The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the ball information. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically displays the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the dynamic display mode being executed is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, The plurality of pieces of identification information that are dynamically displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display executing means. When the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing unit or by the dynamic display executing unit. When some of the identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means. Whether the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.

  Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.

  Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, identification information sequences from the first to the nth (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected. Are displayed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means in units of identification information strings, and then the first to nth identification information strings are arranged in the order of the first to nth identification information strings. Each identification information string is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and stopped, the identification information stop display mode is assumed to be a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the identification information stop display mode Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the changeability determination means. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is executed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Or, even if the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, it is recognized. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information strings during dynamic display in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the first to nth identification information sequences stopped and displayed in the display areas of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, the identification information columns may be arranged in the vertical direction and arranged side by side in the order, the identification information columns may be arranged in the horizontal direction and arranged in the order in the vertical direction, The information columns may be arranged in an oblique direction, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned on the straight line.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, when lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, each of the first to (n-1) th If the same identification information exists in the identification information sequence, it is determined by the identification information determination unit, and if the dynamic display execution unit is executing the dynamic display of the nth identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, The stop display mode is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings is performed in the order of the first to nth identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When it is executed for each identification information sequence, after each of the first to (n-1) th identification information sequences is stopped and displayed, or in a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. Even if it is dynamically displayed, if it is within the period in which the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the n-th identification information sequence being dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner The mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined manner. It can be a period. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the second or third aspect, the following effect is produced. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the first time from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the changing means and the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. There are provided a second dynamic display incapable of executing the changing process by the first changing means until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, and the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are provided. Any one of the dynamic displays is executed by the dynamic display executing means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the change information determination means determines that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, the nth identification information sequence is displayed after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Since the change processing for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means can be executed until the display is stopped, the nth identification information is displayed before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The column identification information can be changed reliably. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information columns is stopped and displayed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be surely changed to a predetermined mode before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the first change means sets the stop display mode of the identification information to the predetermined mode. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, the first change means changes to the stop display mode of the identification information. Has the effect of reducing the control burden.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reservation ball storage area, and a reservation ball execution area. (A) is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the pattern of a normal fluctuation production | presentation, and the content of the production | production, (b) is for describing an example of a chance eye normal fluctuation | variation and the content of the production | production. FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the chance eyes | supermarket variation AD and the production content. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of chance eyes special fluctuation | variation AF, and the production content. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is scrolled horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is vertically scrolled. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a miss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, (c ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the maximum changeable period memory of an effect control apparatus, (b) is the schematic which shows the outline of the maximum changeable period of a deviation | shift fluctuation, (C) is the schematic which shows the outline of the maximum changeable period of a normal reach fluctuation | variation. It is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of an effect control apparatus. (A) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the relationship between the setting value memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table, and a stop symbol (C) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is updated. (A) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a display symbol pattern memory, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus corresponding to the content of a display symbol pattern memory. . It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area sequential advance process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process of the main controller and the payout controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process of an production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol pattern table update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol pattern generation area update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation big prize winning process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol replacement process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal jackpot winning process of the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the back-and-forth losing reach winning process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change production setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation variation setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process of an effect control apparatus. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "probability big hit" within the period (changeable period) in which a stop symbol can be changed. Yes, (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probability big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed. (A) is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" within the period (changeable period) in which a stop symbol can be changed. Yes, (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command having a lottery result of “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "back and forth reach" regardless of whether it is a changeable period. (A) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance stage production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last fluctuation production is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a symbol is changed, (b) is the pattern of the last variation | production effect when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye effect is "normal jackpot". It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when it becomes "super reach fluctuation | variation (40 seconds)" and the content of the stop symbol of a display plan is changed as a result. (A) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a symbol is changed, (b) is the pattern of the last variation | production effect when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye effect is "normal jackpot". It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when it becomes "special reach fluctuation | variation (60 second)" and the content of the stop symbol of a display plan is changed as a result.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b which are light emitting means.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in a lit state, and the gaming state of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, in a short time, or in a normal state, Whether or not the state is changing is indicated by the lighting state. For example, the 1st symbol corresponding to “probable big hit”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “ordinary jackpot”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “out”, and the number of reserved balls are lit. Indicated by status. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display.

  In this pachinko machine 10, three lottery results are provided as “probable big hit” of the first symbol, “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, and “miss” of the first symbol as the jackpot lottery results. . Then, when winning the first entrance 64, whether the first symbol is “probable big hit”, the first symbol “ordinary jackpot”, or the first symbol “out” A lottery will be held.

  As a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 has a “probable big hit” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and the game state is easily shifted to the special gaming state. The probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a game state. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability change (probability change state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol becomes a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance The electric accessory attached to 64 is in an open state for a predetermined time, so that the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “short-time (short-time state)”, and states other than the probability change (probability change state) and the short-time (short-time state) are referred to as “normal state (normal state)”.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases around the time.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is “disconnected” in the first symbol, the state of the game that is neither probabilistic nor short in time (the state where neither the first symbol jackpot probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up) Become.

  In the present embodiment, the “probability jackpot” of the first symbol is a jackpot whose maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and then the jackpot of the first symbol (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The interval is a jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the 1st symbol means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the 1st symbol shifts to a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), and a predetermined fluctuation The jackpot (16R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased only for the number of times (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal big hit” of the first symbol is achieved, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). However, instead, it may be configured to continue increasing the winning probability of the second symbol until the next lottery result of the first symbol is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first symbol “probability big hit” or the first symbol “ordinary big hit” is set, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, but the number of rounds is an arbitrary number (for example, , 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). Further, the number of rounds may be different between the “probability big hit” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be 16 rounds in the case of “probability big hit” of the first symbol, and the maximum number of rounds may be eight rounds in the case of “normal jackpot” of the first symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “probability big hit” of the first symbol is reached, the probability of winning the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the big jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. However, instead of this, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be increased only for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the following description, the “probable big jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “probable big jackpot”, the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “normal jackpot”, and the first The symbol “displacement” is simply referred to as “disconnection”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. , Passing through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held is provided.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117, which will be described later. For example, three symbol strings of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 9). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the lottery result of the jackpot. A decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, after the jackpot lottery is started, in the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol (one of the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, or the first symbol indicating the loss) When the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64 before the symbol is displayed, the number of winning (entering) is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of holds is the first symbol display device. 37 and the number of the special figure holding lamps 85 that are turned on. Hereinafter, the number of suspensions for the first entrance 64 is referred to as the special figure reservation ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding number is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, the number of suspensions may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special figure hold lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variation display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is kept for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to enter the first entrance 64 easily.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the ball is held at the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, but 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the general winning slot 63 are the same. However, the number may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. A specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 203 has a reserved ball storage area 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203b, a special figure reserved ball counter 203c, a work area 203d, and a prefetch high probability state flag 203e. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 18), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing when a ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. (See FIG. 5) and a memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). In the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times. The specific configuration of the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when winning (entering) to the first entrance 64 is detected and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is stored (suspended) in the retaining ball storage area 203a. (I.e., when the number N of special figure holding balls at the time of winning a prize is less than 4), immediately, based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored (held) separately from the start of the variable production. The lottery result and the stop symbol pattern are acquired. In addition, as soon as a winning is detected, separately from the start of the fluctuating effect, acquiring a lottery result and a stop symbol pattern based on data corresponding to the winning (each value of each counter C1 to C3), Hereinafter, it is described that the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are prefetched. Then, as soon as the prefetching ends, a winning information command indicating the prefetched lottery result and the stop symbol pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  When a prize information command is received by the production control device 117, a stop symbol (to be described later) is displayed based on the lottery result and the stop symbol pattern indicated by the prize information command. It is determined whether the variation effect (variation display) “” is continuously performed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “continuous chance eye effect”).

  Specific examples of “chance eyes” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B. In this embodiment, there are two types of “reach chance eyes” and “off chance eyes”. Have a chance eye. The “reach chance eyes” is a stop symbol that is displayed when an out-of-bounds reach occurs in a variable effect when a continuous chance eye effect is being performed. It is a stop symbol to stop. Further, the “off chance chance” is a stop symbol in which no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In the following description, when both “reach chance eyes” and “out chance chances” are indicated, or only one of them is indicated, “chance eyes” is simply described.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to “chance”, and further, the stop symbol during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to change to “chance eyes” during the fluctuating performance. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Opportunities can be displayed.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance eyes” in the middle of the variation effect, when the winning information command is received, if the variation effect is being performed, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do. Further, by making the stop symbol “chance eyes”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  The reserved ball execution area 203b is a memory in which data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of jackpot or setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is stored.

  When processing such as jackpot determination or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a described above. Of each value) is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in this embodiment means that the data is moved from the area where the data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure reservation ball counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of times a first prize is held for the first entrance 64, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls. The special figure holding ball counter 203c has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  In the above-described special figure holding lamp 85 (see FIG. 2), the same number of lamps as the special figure holding ball number N are turned on. More specifically, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) changes, the special figure reservation ball after the counter value changes from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117. A pending number command indicating the value of the number N is transmitted. When the production control device 117 receives the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special figure hold lamp 85 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command. .

  The work area 203d is an area for storing data related to the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203d.

  The prefetching high probability state flag 203e has a high probability of jackpot probability when prefetching the lottery result or the stop symbol pattern based on the newly held winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3). This flag indicates whether winning data should be analyzed as being in a state, or winning data should be analyzed as having a low probability of jackpot (normal state). Further, the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  When the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and when the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is off, the jackpot probability is low. The winning data is analyzed as a probability state. In a general pachinko machine, if a lottery is drawn and if the lottery result is “probable big jackpot”, the big hit probability is high until the next big jackpot (probable big jackpot or normal jackpot) Transition to a state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” or “off”, the jackpot probability shifts to a normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the newly-paid winning data is analyzed when it is held, and the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is sequentially updated according to the analyzed lottery result. Yes. Thus, after the new winning data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the new winning data can be obtained without waiting until the start of the fluctuating effect corresponding to the new winning and acquiring the lottery result. When acquired, the lottery result can be analyzed (prefetched) based on the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, the reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, and the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3 provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the reserved ball execution area 203b.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination and display setting of the first symbol display device 37, It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated (returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value).

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is set at an interval of 4 ms that is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 18) or an interval of 2 ms that is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203a and a reserved ball execution area 203b. As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203a stores each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. It is memory.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a is composed of four reserved areas (a reserved first area to a reserved fourth area). The four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a include a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2, and 203a3 are not necessarily provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the reserved ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2, 203a3 is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the rest are newly stored. It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. The reserved ball execution area 203b is provided with a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, when a big win lottery is started, it is stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a by the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 20). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is shifted to each area 203b1 to 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21), and the lottery winning result is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result are performed. The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the big hit lottery is started, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 in the holding first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the holding ball execution area 203b. Shifted. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. The

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203b is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area of the holding ball storage area 203a is executed by a holding ball storage area forward feed process (see FIG. 20) described later. Shift processing is performed in which data stored (suspended) in (second to fourth) is packed into an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved area (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the data shift in the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is “4” and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reservation ball storage area 203a. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the data in the other areas (second to fourth) are each assigned the area number 1. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. .

  For example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is “2”, only the data in the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is thus completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data (holding number) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a is counted by the special figure holding number counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. If it occurs, data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to the value (special figure holding ball number N) indicated by the special figure holding number counter 203c. doing.

  Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the reserved area, so that data is transferred from the shift source area to the shift destination area. After shifting, the data of the shift source area can be left as it is without being cleared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of random numbers to be jackpots: low probability (normal hit probability is normal) and high probability (high hit probability is higher than normal). Low probability (big hit probability) There are two types of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state), the values are “373,727”, and the random number values that are jackpots at the time of high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) are 13 The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “0,4 And two types of hits are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 includes a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, “probable big jackpot” and “normal jackpot”, and one type corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that “big hit” and “high probability state (probability change big hit) after the big hit” based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 Is “probable jackpot”, and “normal jackpot” is determined when it is determined as “big jackpot” and “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”. In addition, a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. .

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Stop before and after detachment reach” (for example, a range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than detachment before and after detachment” (for example, a range of 9 to 38) after the reach has occurred and the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach design. Then, three stop (effect) patterns (modes of display results of dynamic display) are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) in which reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. 203a.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure pending number counter This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the value of 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, when each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a in a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is secured. Therefore, a table having a narrow random value range of 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “front / rear out of reach” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than back and forth out” is 9 to 50, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the low probability state (the state where the big hit probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, the three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter” and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 causes a deviation variation (11-second effect), a normal reach variation (20-second effect), a super reach variation (40-second effect), and a special reach variation (60-second effect). ), One pattern (display mode) is determined. By determining this pattern, a rough variation time of the symbol variation is determined. Hereinafter, these four variation effect patterns are referred to as normal variation effect patterns.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 6-8, the pattern of the change effect provided in this Embodiment is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, 15 types of variation effect patterns are provided, and in addition to the above-described four factors of deviation variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, and special reach variation, chance eye normal variation (20-second effect) , Chance eyes super fluctuations A to D (production for 40 seconds each) and chance eyes special fluctuations A to F (production for 60 seconds each) are provided.

  Although the details will be described later, the chance eye normal fluctuation is executed instead of the normal reach fluctuation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D are determined in advance. When the condition is satisfied, instead of the super reach variation, the chance special variation A to F is executed instead of the special reach variation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When this chance normal variation, chance super variation A to D, and chance special variation A to F are executed, a “chance eye” is displayed at least once within the variation time, and then a stop symbol is displayed. . The predetermined conditions will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  First, a normal variation effect pattern will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a normal variation effect pattern and the contents of the effect. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the out-of-range fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 11 seconds after the start of execution of the effect (for example, high-speed fluctuation). Similarly, in the case of the normal reach variation, the stop symbol is displayed 20 seconds after the start of the production, the super reach variation is 40 seconds, and the special reach is 60 seconds. Normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation each generate a reach and perform a flashy production (hereinafter referred to as “reach fluctuation”) to give the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state that is advantageous. It is something to have.

  Next, the chance eye normal fluctuation will be described. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance normal variation and the effect contents. The chance normal variation (20 seconds) is executed instead of the normal reach variation (20 seconds), and the “chance eye” is displayed once within the variation time. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the chance eye normal fluctuation is composed of a deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) and a reach fluctuation (9 seconds). An out-of-range change is executed with the symbol “chance”, followed by a reach change, and a stop symbol is displayed.

  Next, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye super fluctuations A to D and the contents of the effects. The chance eye super fluctuations A to D (40 seconds each) are executed instead of the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The chance eye super fluctuations A and B are configured to display the “chance eye” once within the fluctuation time. Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation C is twice and the chance eye super fluctuation D is 3 in the same manner. It is configured to display once. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the chance super variation A is composed of a deviation variation (11 seconds) and a reach variation (29 seconds). The “off chance” deviation fluctuation is executed, and the reach fluctuation is executed subsequently, and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation B is composed of two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation with the “chance eye” symbol is first executed, and then again, Normal reach change is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the chance eye super fluctuation C is composed of two deviation fluctuations (each 10 seconds) and a normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds). This is executed twice in succession, followed by normal reach fluctuation and a stop symbol is displayed. The chance super variation D is composed of four deviations (each 10 seconds). When the execution is started, first, the chance symbol “chance eye” deviation variation is executed three times in a row. Then, the deviation variation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal deviation fluctuation (see FIG. 6A) is an effect of 11 seconds, in this 10-second deviation fluctuation, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the fluctuation starts is shortened by 1 second. .

  Next, the chance eye special fluctuations A to F will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye special fluctuations A to F and the effect contents. The chance eye special fluctuations A to F (each 60 seconds) are executed in place of the special reach fluctuations (60 seconds). The chance eye special fluctuations A and B are configured to display the “chance eye” once within the fluctuation time. Similarly, the chance eye special fluctuations C and D are twice, and the chance eye special fluctuation E Is displayed three times and the chance special variation F is displayed four times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the chance special variation A is composed of a deviation variation (11 seconds) and a reach variation (49 seconds). The “off chance” deviation fluctuation is executed, and the reach fluctuation is executed subsequently, and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, the chance eye special fluctuation B is composed of a normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) and a super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation whose stop symbol is “chance eye” first. Is executed, and then the super reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Moreover, the chance special variation C is composed of three normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds each). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation with the stop symbol “chance eye” is executed twice in succession. Once again, the normal reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Further, the chance eye special fluctuation D is composed of two deviation fluctuations (each 10 seconds) and a super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). When the execution is started, the stop symbol is first out of the “chance eye”. The fluctuation is executed twice in succession, and then the super reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. The chance eye special fluctuation E is composed of two deviation fluctuations (10 seconds each) and two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds each). When the execution is started, the stop symbol is “chance eye” first. The deviation variation is executed twice in succession, and subsequently, the normal reach variation in which the stop symbol is “chance” is executed. Finally, the normal reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the chance special variation F is composed of five deviation fluctuations (10 seconds or 16 seconds). When the execution is started, the deviation pattern of the “chance eye” is first executed (16 seconds). Subsequently, the deviation of the stop symbol “chance” is continuously executed three times (for 10 seconds). Finally, the deviation variation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. Note that the normal deviation fluctuation (see FIG. 6A) is an effect of 11 seconds, whereas in the deviation fluctuation of 16 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the fluctuation starts is extended by 5 seconds. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, “chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds)” or “chance eye super fluctuation A” by combining normal fluctuation effects (out-of-range fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc.). ~ D (40 seconds) "and" Chance Eye Special Fluctuation (60 seconds) "," Chance Eye Normal Fluctuation "," Chance Eye Super Fluctuation AD ", and" Chance Eye Special Fluctuation " When executing a variation effect according to “A to F”, it is only necessary to combine the effect data used for the normal variation effect. Therefore, special production data (variation production data described later) is prepared only for “chance eye normal fluctuation”, “chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “chance eye special fluctuation A to F”. Therefore, the amount of variable effect data stored in the character ROM 275 of the effect control device 117 described later can be suppressed, and consumption of the character ROM 275 can be suppressed.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation effect (variation display) is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is scrolled vertically.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols. The details of the virtual symbol reel will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to a “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction of the variable display (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first per random number counter storage area of the reserved ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change according to the value of 203b1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is variably displayed so as to scroll (horizontal scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 9B, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from top to bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2', and Z3 'are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, in the left symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the right symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. Is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right or the top, middle, and bottom three levels. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five valid lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in both cases of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of horizontal scrolling, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. ing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of an upper line L1 ′, a middle line L2 ′, a lower line L3 ′, a right rising line L4 ′, and a left rising line L5 ′ are effective lines. Is set.

  In each game, when the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the variable display scrolling vertically or horizontally is stopped, the jackpot is set as the jackpot A video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 9A), the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scrolling (FIG. 9B). The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B, “chance eyes (missing chance eyes, reach chance eyes)” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIGS. 10A and 10B show an example of a stop symbol when the direction of variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled horizontally (in the direction of arrow X in the figure). . FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the “miss chance” displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 10B shows the “reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "the chance eye".

  First, the “off chance chance” will be described. As described above, the “miss chance” is a stop pattern in which three identical symbols are displayed but stopped without reaching. In FIG. 10A, the “turtle” symbol is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Reach has not occurred in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a reach is not generated, and a stop symbol on which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is regarded as a “miss chance”. In the example shown in FIG. 10 (a), the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is “turtle”. A pattern (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) may be used.

  Next, the “reach chance” will be described. As described above, the “reach chance” is a stop symbol that stops after three reachable symbols are displayed after a reach has occurred. In FIG. 10B, the symbol “octopus” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, among the five effective lines L1 to L5, reach occurs in the effective line L2, but it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, in this way, reach has occurred, but it is not a hit, and a stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, “octopus”) are displayed is a “reach chance”. It is said. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 10A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, “shark” or “turtle”) as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned “displacement chance eyes” shown in FIG. 10A and “reach chance eyes” shown in FIG. 10B are examples, and the stop positions of the same symbol are not limited thereto. For example, if the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a “miss chance”. Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is “reach chance”.

  In the present embodiment, as a stop symbol pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned “disappearance chance eyes” and “reach chance eyes”, a “probability variable jackpot symbol” indicating a probability variable jackpot. Or, a “normal jackpot symbol” indicating a normal jackpot, a “rear-rear-reach reach symbol” indicating a back-and-forth off-reach, a “reach pattern other than front-back off” indicating a reach other than a back-and-forth miss, or a “completely missed symbol” indicating a complete miss Is provided.

  Here, returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′ in this embodiment) after the reach has occurred until it stops. The number of variable symbols) is determined. Then, based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the effect control device 117 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode.

  Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, but the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or the first variation type counter CS1 and It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the stop symbol.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. When selecting (variation effect pattern), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a change time (number of change symbols) from the value of the change type counter CS2 (random number value) until the last stop symbol stops is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37, and can slide the symbol which is changing in addition to the variation of a symbol. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), and conversely, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the fluctuation display time (for example, − 1 second) or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the fluctuation time.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS3. A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding number counter 203c Depending on the value (number of special figure reservation balls N) and the like, tables with different selection ratios of each effect pattern are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  Here, returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). A switch 208 and a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid 209 for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, on the condition that the touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output in the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure holding lamp 85, and turns on the lamps in the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. In addition, it controls the setting of turning off and the third symbol display effect (variation display) and jackpot effect on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. For example, the control regarding the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp in the special figure hold lamp 85 is executed based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280. An MPU 271 is connected to the input / output port 277 via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 is connected to the main control device 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the special figure holding lamp 85, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like.

  In addition, a character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory. The ROM 272 of the effect control device 117 includes a virtual symbol reel memory 272a and a maximum changeable period memory 272b. In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, virtual symbol reels indicating the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the three symbol rows Z1, upper, middle, and lower (left, middle, and right). It is stored for each of Z2 and Z3 (Z1 ′, Z2 ′, Z3 ′), and the maximum changeable period memory 272b displays the stop symbol of the variable effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 as another stop. The maximum changeable period (hereinafter referred to as “maximum changeable period”) is stored in the symbol. Note that the period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol is simply referred to as a changeable period.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C, the virtual symbol reel memory 272a of the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 (left symbol row Z1 ′), and FIG. 11B shows a middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol row Z2 ′). ) Is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to (), and FIG. 11 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol column Z3 (right symbol column Z3 ′).

  In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, a virtual symbol reel indicating the arrangement of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored for each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Memory. As described above, the arrangement of the third symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is determined for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers "and a sub-pattern (shell design in this embodiment) formed smaller than the main design. Yes. One virtual symbol reel indicates the arrangement of the third symbol in one symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1 is composed of 18 third symbols. From the top to the rear, the symbols are arranged as follows: “shellfish”, “crab (9)”, “shellfish”, “angel fish (hereinafter referred to as“ A fish ”) (8)”,. Shells "and" Octopus (1) "are arranged in this order, and an array number indicating arrangement on the virtual symbol reel is given from 1 to 18 in the sequence of the symbols. In addition, after the last “octopus (1)” symbol, it returns to the first symbol and repeats in the order of “shellfish”, “crab (9)”, “shellfish”,.

  The numbers enclosed in parentheses with the name of the character symbol indicate the number corresponding to the character symbol. For example, the symbol “crab” is the symbol corresponding to the number “9”. Show. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the upper symbol row Z1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the virtual symbol reel in the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 third symbols. The arrangement of the symbols is the opposite of the arrangement of the upper symbol row Z1, and from the head toward the rear, “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. 9) "and" shellfish ". And the array element number which shows arrangement | positioning in a virtual symbol reel is attached | subjected from 1 to 18 in the arrangement | sequence order. In addition, after the last “shellfish” symbol, it returns to the top symbol and repeats in the order of “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the lower symbol row Z3, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub-symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the lower symbol row Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the virtual symbol reel in the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 third symbols, and the symbol arrangement is the same as the virtual symbol reels in the lower symbol row Z3. It is an arrangement with two symbols, “shark (4)” and “shellfish” added at the end. Then, as in the case of the virtual symbol reels in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the next symbol after the final “shellfish” is returned to the top symbol, and “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “ Haresenbon (2) ”,... Is repeatedly repeated in this order, and the sequence numbers are also assigned from 1 to 20 in order from the beginning to the rear of the sequence. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the middle symbol row Z2, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117, and FIG. 12B shows an outline of the maximum changeable period of outlier fluctuation. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the maximum changeable period of the normal reach fluctuation.

  In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  The maximum changeable period memory 272b is a memory that stores a maximum changeable period of deviation fluctuation that is started in the third symbol display device 81 and a maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, 10 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of outlier fluctuation, and 15 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as variations of a normal variation effect, deviation variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), special reach variation (60 Seconds). However, among them, the fluctuation effects for changing the stop symbol during the fluctuation effects are only the deviation fluctuation and the normal reach fluctuation. The reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although the overall time of the variation effect differs for each variation effect pattern, the three symbol sequences (for example, the upper symbol sequence Z1, the middle symbol sequence Z2, and the lower symbol sequence Z3) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. In FIG. 9A, the time until the first upper symbol row Z1 and the second lower symbol row Z3 are stopped is common (10 seconds).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is executed, immediately after the start of execution, three symbol rows (for example, upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, lower symbol row) Each of the columns Z3 (see FIG. 9A) starts high-speed fluctuation. Thereafter, the upper symbol row Z1 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stopped after 9 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 is simultaneously with the stop of the upper symbol row Z1 (that is, after 9 seconds). It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation and stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds) and stops after 11 seconds.

  Regardless of deviation fluctuation (11 seconds), in each fluctuation effect, the first upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation for 1 second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, and further to low speed fluctuation. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping. Similarly, the second lower symbol row Z3 for 1 second from 9 seconds to 10 seconds and the third middle symbol row Z2 for 1 second from 10 seconds to 11 seconds are changed from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) control processing such as switching and further switching to low-speed fluctuation and stopping.

  Therefore, after the stop display of the upper symbol row Z1 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is started, that is, after the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation. In addition, even after the medium speed fluctuation is switched to the low speed fluctuation, the third symbol so that the same main symbol (the main symbol contained in the upper symbol row Z1) is included in each of the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. If the symbol is replaced (changed), the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to “chance”. That is, even after the upper symbol row Z1 starts low-speed fluctuation (after 8 seconds) after the start of outlier fluctuation, if the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changing at high speed (less than 9 seconds), the middle symbol row Z2 Further, by replacing (changing) the third symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, the stop symbol of the deviation variation can be changed to “chance”.

  Therefore, only when the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed (for example, less than 8 seconds), changing the stop symbol during the changing effect to “chance” It is possible to secure a longer period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the same main symbol. However, the third symbol may be changed so as to fall within the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the start of the deviation fluctuation, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and after the stop symbol display of the lower symbol row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds), that is, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed. Even after switching to fluctuation, or after switching from medium speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation, if the middle symbol row Z2 is changing fast (less than 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed). The stop pattern of deviation fluctuation can be changed to “chance”.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is 10 seconds.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 12C, when normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed, three symbols of upper, middle, and lower immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of outlier fluctuation. Rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 each start high-speed fluctuation, upper symbol row Z1 stops after 9 seconds, lower symbol row Z3 stops after 10 seconds, and middle symbol row Z2 changes at medium speed and slow after 10 seconds. Switch in order of variation. However, after that, after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 10 seconds, the display is stopped.

  In the case of normal reach fluctuation, the same main symbol is always included in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Even if the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), so the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced even if the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at medium speed or low speed. By (changing), it is possible to change the stop pattern of out-of-fluctuation fluctuation to “chance”.

  Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed (for example, less than 10 seconds), the changeable period can be secured longer than when changing the stop symbol during the changing effect to “chance”. It is possible to further increase the chances of performing the continuous chance eyes production.

  For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed. Here, the reason for setting it to less than 5 seconds is to make sure that the stop symbol is changed. Depending on the contents of the control processing (for example, when the control burden is small), the maximum changeable period is 10 seconds. It may be close to. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, opportunities for performing the continuous chance effect can be further increased. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of the third symbol arrangement determined by the virtual symbol reel. It is comprised so that. For example, if the remaining effect time is short (1 second) after the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started like the deviation fluctuation, even if the stop symbol is changed, the scrolling display is performed up to the changed third symbol. In some cases, the desired stop symbol cannot be displayed. However, if it is normal reach fluctuation, after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the remaining effect time is long (10 seconds). If it is less than 5 seconds after the start of the stop display, the stop symbol is changed, Up to the changed third symbol can be scroll-displayed, and a desired stop symbol can be reliably displayed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed only when the changed stop symbol (“chance eye”) can be reliably displayed, such as the normal reach variation, so regardless of the deviation variation or the normal reach variation. The control burden can be reduced as compared with the case of changing the stop symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the change of a stop symbol may be tried irrespective of a deviation fluctuation and a normal reach fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of out-of-range fluctuation (11 seconds), the high-speed fluctuation time of the middle symbol row Z2 is short (1 second), so the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed). Although there is no change, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is lengthened (for example, 6 seconds, etc.), and the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) as in the case of the normal reach fluctuation. Also good.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period is changed according to the variation effect pattern, but all the maximum changeable periods are the same time (8 seconds) regardless of the variation effect pattern. ). In other words, if all of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the third symbol of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is replaced (changed) and removed. You may comprise so that the stop symbol of a fluctuation | variation may be changed into a "chance eye". As described above, for one second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed fluctuation, and further, the control process such as switching to the low speed fluctuation and stopping is performed reliably (follow-up). This is a margin period provided for Therefore, depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the maximum changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, opportunities for performing the continuous chance effect can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is set to 15 seconds, but may be determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. That is, since the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach, the time that allows the control process to be executed reliably is subtracted from the determined time. The maximum changeable period. If comprised in this way, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured longest according to the production content, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance eye production can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds) is the same as the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds). There is no need to set it as desired. For example, the timing at which stop display of the lower symbol row Z3 is started may be made faster than the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the lower symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed is lower than the timing when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the stop display of the column Z3 is started may be delayed. The same applies to the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (after 10 seconds) and the timing at which the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds). It can be set arbitrarily.

  Here, returning to FIG. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / O values. Working area (working area). Further, the RAM 273 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 includes a stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a, a special figure holding ball counter 273b, a chance eye consecutive number counter 273c, a variation time memory 273d, a variation time counter 273e, and a variation start flag 273f. The stop symbol changeable period flag 273g, the stop symbol setting flag 273h, the stop symbol set flag 273i, the chance eye display number selection counter 273j, the pseudo change chance eye display number memory 273k, and the stop symbol pattern table memory 273l and a display symbol pattern memory 273m.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is a memory for storing a stop symbol instruction storage table. The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a set value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the variation effect being executed and each variation effect scheduled to be executed are executed individually. is there.

  Here, the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and FIG. 14B is an example of the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110 and a set value set in accordance with the command. is there.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a set value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the variation effect being executed and each variation effect scheduled to be executed are executed individually. is there. As shown in FIG. 14A, the stop symbol instruction storage table includes an execution area, a first holding area, a second holding area, a third holding area, a fourth holding area, and a next holding area. Is provided.

  In the execution area, a set value indicating a stop pattern of the variation effect being executed is stored, and the first to fourth reserved areas and the next reserved area are set when the variable effect scheduled to be executed is executed. The set value of the power stop symbol is stored. More specifically, in the first reserved area, a set value of a stop symbol to be set when a variation effect scheduled to be executed next, that is, a variation effect whose order of execution is the first is executed is stored. The

  Similarly, in the second reserved area, the execution schedule is the second variation effect, in the third reservation area, the execution schedule is the third variation effect, and in the fourth reservation area, the execution schedule is scheduled. The set values of stop symbols to be set when the fourth variation effect is executed are stored. The next reserved area is an area in which the set value is stored only when the set value is stored in each of the first to fourth reserved areas. In the next reserved area, the set value of the stop symbol to be set when the variation effect corresponding to the set value of the fourth reservation area is finished and the next variation effect is executed is stored.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, “off” is stored as a set value in the execution area. Hereinafter, in order to clarify that it is a set value, when the set value is indicated, “set value:” is described before each set value. For example, when the set value is “out”, “set value: out” is described. Then, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area. Similarly, “setting value: chance chance & probable big hit” is stored in the third holding area, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and nothing is stored in the next holding area. Absent.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, when the variation production corresponding to the setting value of an execution area is complete | finished and the next variation production is started, the setting value of a 1st holding | maintenance area is shifted to an execution area. Then, each set value of the second to fourth reserved areas is shifted to the area with the smaller area number (first to third reserved area), and the set value of the next reserved area is shifted to the fourth reserved area. The Thereby, the setting value which shows the stop symbol of the variation production in execution is memorize | stored in the execution area. In addition, when shifting the setting value of each holding area (the 1st-4th holding area, the next holding area), for example, it may be performed only when the setting value is stored in the holding area of the shift source. As a result, the number of data shifts can be reduced, so that the control burden can be reduced. Further, the setting value of each holding area (the first to fourth holding areas and the next holding area) may be shifted regardless of whether or not the setting value is stored in the holding area of the shift source. good.

  Next, the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect. As shown in FIG. 14B, in this embodiment, eight types of setting values are provided. Specifically, as the set value, “set value: miss”, “set value: chance chance”, “set value: skip after miss”, “set value: skip after jackpot”, “set value: first skip”, “Set value: jackpot”, “set value: chance eye & probability variable jackpot”, and “set value: chance eye & normal jackpot” are provided.

  If a variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is “setting value: out”, the stop symbol of the variation effect becomes “out symbol other than chance” and the execution area is set. If the variation effect is executed when the value is “set value: chance”, the stop symbol of the variation effect becomes “chance”. Similarly, when a variation effect is executed when the setting value of the execution area is “setting value: skip after losing”, “setting value: skip after jackpot”, “setting value: first skip”, When the stop symbol is “out-of-chance symbols other than chance” and the variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area is “setting value: jackpot”, the stop symbol of the variation effect is “probable bonus jackpot” Or “normal jackpot symbol”. Which jackpot stop symbol will be determined is determined when a stop symbol command described later is received by the effect control device 117.

  In addition, when a variation effect is executed when the setting value of the execution area is “setting value: chance chance & probable big hit”, the chance effect is displayed at least once in the variation effect, and finally The stop symbol is “probable big hit symbol”. In addition, when a variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area is “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot”, the chance effect is displayed at least once in the variation effect, and finally The stop symbol is “normal jackpot symbol”.

  Next, the timing at which a new set value is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110 and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. When the effect control device 117 receives the winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110, the set value corresponding to the received winning information command is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. . In that case, the set values are stored in the order of the smaller area numbers in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  As shown in FIG. 14C, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “rear out of front / rear out”, “reach out of front / rear out”, or “complete out”, “setting value: out” stores the stop symbol instruction. Newly stored in the table. Further, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot”, “setting value: jackpot” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  Although details will be described later, when the set value corresponding to the received winning information command (lottery result) is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the contents of the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed. Accordingly, the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table are updated (see S1509, S1510, and S1512 in FIG. 34). When this update is performed, “setting value: out” and “setting value: jackpot” stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed to any of the eight types of setting values described above.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The special figure holding ball counter 273b is a counter that counts the number of times a prize is held for the first entrance 64 (the number N of special figure holding balls). The special figure holding ball counter 273b has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the initial value of the RAM is set (see S1013 in FIG. 27). Note that the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b (number of special figure holding balls N) is determined when a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 33), a variation pattern command, and an effect. It is updated when a time addition command is received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The chance-number continuous number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance-number” is continuously executed. The chance number continuous number counter 273c is incremented by 1 each time a fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” is executed, and when the continuous chance effect is ended (see S1417 in FIG. 33). Initialized to “0” when initial value is set (see S1013 in FIG. 27).

  The variation time memory 273d is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received, the variation time is stored in the variation time memory 273d (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern (out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation, etc.) to be executed, and the effect time addition command should be started. It is a command indicating a notice effect pattern of a variable effect. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern, and the extension time and the reduction time are determined for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, the variation time memory 273d stores the total time of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the extension time (shortening time) corresponding to the effect time addition command.

  The variation time counter 273e is a counter that stores an elapsed time after the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 273f is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33), and the third symbol display device When the variable effect is started in 81, it is set to OFF (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

  Whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). This flag is set to ON only when an out-of-range change or a normal reach change is started (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 39). While the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off, it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Specifically, the changeable period has been exceeded or the variation effect has not been executed. Such as the case.

  The stop symbol setting flag 273h is a flag that indicates whether or not the stop symbol of the variable effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is being set. When the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on, it indicates that the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started (or started) is being set, and the stop symbol setting flag 273h is In the case of OFF, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol has been completed or that the stop symbol has not been set yet.

  The stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variable effect that has been started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 has been set. The stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON when the stop symbol setting is completed. When the stop symbol set flag 273i is off, it indicates that the stop symbol has not been set yet.

  For example, the chance eye display count selection counter 273j is incremented by 1 within a range of 1 to 4, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 4), and then returns to 1. When the chance super variation A to D is executed instead of the super reach variation during the continuous chance eye production, or when the chance special variation A to F is executed instead of the special reach variation, this chance eye The value of the display number selection counter 273j is referred to. Then, among the chance eye super fluctuations A to D or the chance eye special fluctuations A to F, the one that displays “chance eyes” as many times as the referenced value is selected and executed.

  The pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k continuously displays “chance eyes” in the change effect when the chance change normal change, the chance eye super change A to D, or the chance eye special change A to F is executed. A memory in which the number of times is stored.

  The stop symbol pattern table memory 273l is a memory for storing a stop symbol pattern table. The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance a third symbol array (a symbol combination) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. Note that this table only stores information indicating the “third symbol arrangement” (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol arrangement information”), and does not store image data or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to be displayed is It is acquired from the stop symbol pattern table. And in order to comprise the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information, the image data of the 3rd symbol contained in the stop symbol is acquired. Thereafter, according to the arrangement of the third symbol indicated by the third symbol arrangement information, the image of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, the stop symbol pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table, and FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table that is being updated. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing, in advance, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as the pattern of the stop symbol, “displacement chance eyes”, “reach chance eyes”, “probability big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, “front and rear outlier reach symbol”, “ Reach symbols other than front / rear detachment ”and“ complete detachment symbol ”are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the stop symbol pattern table includes a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, a front / rear reach area, a reach area other than front / rear miss, a reach chance area, and a chance area. A completely off-area and a symbol pattern generation area are provided.

  The probability variation jackpot area is an area for storing the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “probability variation jackpot symbol”. Similarly, the normal jackpot area corresponds to the “normal jackpot symbol”, the front / rear reach area corresponds to the “front / rear reach symbol”, the reach area other than the front / rear portion corresponds to the “reach symbol other than the front / rear out” The chance eye area corresponds to “reach chance eye”, the miss chance area corresponds to “miss chance eye”, and the completely missed area stores each third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “completely missed symbol” It is an area. Although the details will be described later, the symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating the stop symbol pattern table.

  Each area is provided with a first area, a second area, and a third area. In the first area, three symbol rows (for example, displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are provided. Among the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 9A)), information indicating each symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stored. Similarly, in the second area, Information indicating each symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stored, and information indicating each symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stored in the third area.

  Specifically, in the first area, there is a virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, and at the left end of the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, “6” is stored in the first area of the probability variation jackpot area, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. And Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, when the array number is “6”, the upper symbol row Z1 is sequentially changed from “left” to “right”. 7) "," shellfish ", and" Ankou (6) ". Similarly, when the array number of the second area is “12”, the middle symbol row Z2 is arranged in the order of “shell”, “dugong (7)”, “shell” in order from left to right. When the array number of the third area is “11”, the lower symbol row Z3 is “Ancho (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong (7)” in order from left to right. It shows that it is a symbol row lined with.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, since “Dugong (7)” is arranged on the left rising line L5 (see FIG. 9A), it becomes a stop symbol indicating the probability variation big hit symbol. Therefore, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on each array number of the probability variation jackpot area, the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed.

  The same explanation applies to the normal jackpot area, the front / rear miss reach area, the reach area other than the front / rear miss, the reach chance area, the miss chance area, and the complete miss area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored in the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The amount of information stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Next, the symbol pattern generation area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating each area (probability jackpot area or normal jackpot area) in the stop symbol pattern table. In each of the first to third areas, a value like a counter is set. It will be updated.

  Specifically, 1 is added to the third area periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the third area is cleared to 1. , 1 is added to the second area. When the value of the second area reaches the maximum value (that is, 20), the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the first area is simply cleared to 1.

  Each time the value of the symbol pattern generation area is updated, the updated value (array number) of each of the first to third areas is changed to which area (for example, probability change) in the stopped symbol pattern table. It is determined whether it corresponds to a jackpot area or a normal jackpot area), and the updated value (array number) of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the determined area. That is, a new 3rd symbol array (combination of symbols) is generated in the symbol pattern generation area, and then the generated 3rd symbol array is an area corresponding to the 3rd symbol array (for example, probability variation big hit Area (usually a big hit area).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, “15” is stored in the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, “1” is stored in the second area, and “18” is stored in the third area. Suppose that Here, at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. In this case, since the value of the third area exceeds the maximum value (18), the third area is cleared to 1. At the same time, 1 is added to the second area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is updated to a state where the first area is “15”, the second area is “2”, and the third area is “1”.

  When the first area is “15”, it indicates that the upper symbol row Z1 is a symbol row lined with “shell”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shell” in order from left to right. Similarly, when the second area is “2”, the middle symbol row Z2 is aligned with “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”, and when the third area is “1”, It is shown that the column Z3 is a symbol row along with “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, and “harisenbon (3)”.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, since “Harisenbon (2)” exists in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3, it becomes a stop symbol that indicates a chance to miss. Therefore, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the missed chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Then, once again at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is “15” for the first area, “2” for the second area, The three areas are updated to the state “2”. Therefore, in this case, only the arrangement of the lower symbol row Z3 is updated.

  When the third area is “2”, the lower symbol row Z3 indicates a symbol row alongside “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”. Since “Harisenbon (2)” is arranged in L2, it becomes a stop symbol indicating a normal jackpot symbol. Therefore, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the missed chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Similarly, the update of the stop symbol pattern table is repeated every time the symbol pattern generation area is updated. As a result of updating the symbol pattern generation area, if a stop symbol indicating a front / rear reach symbol or a reach symbol other than front / rear error is generated, the updated symbol pattern generation area value is displayed in the stop symbol pattern table. Is stored in the reach area other than front / rear and the reach area other than front / rear, but if the stop symbol is the reach chance, the updated symbol pattern generation area value is the reach chance area. Also remembered.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The display symbol pattern memory 273m is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbols that are actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display symbol pattern memory 273m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and FIG. 16B shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of arrow X in the figure) will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′. In addition, the middle symbol row Z2 may be replaced with the middle symbol row Z2 ′, and the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  The display symbol pattern memory 273m is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbols) of the stop symbols that are actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided.

  That is, in the first area, the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, “6” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. In this state, it is assumed that a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in order from left to right. , “Dugong (7)”, “Shell”, “Ankou (6)” are displayed.

  Similarly, since the array number of the second area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2, it is arranged in order of "shellfish", "Dugong (7)", and "shellfish" from left to right. A symbol row is displayed, and the sequence number of the third area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, in order from the left to the right, “Ankou (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong ( 7) "is displayed. As described above, the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. In addition, since it becomes the same description also about the case where another array number is memorize | stored in each of the 1st-3rd area, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored in the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The amount of information stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores, for example, various data for effects used for variable effects, the character pattern of the third symbol, the background symbol, the notice character symbol, and the like. The various types of data for production correspond to data used for variation production of out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, and special reach variation (hereinafter referred to as “variable representation data”).

  As described above, the chance effect normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and the chance eye special fluctuation A to F are the fluctuation effects of the outlier fluctuation, the normal reach fluctuation, the super reach fluctuation, and the special reach fluctuation. Since they are combined, variation effect data used only for each variation effect of the chance variation normal variation, the chance interval super variation A to D, and the chance interval special variation A to F is not stored. However, it is also possible to prepare fluctuation effect data used only for each fluctuation effect of the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D, and the chance eye special fluctuations A to F and store them in the character ROM 275.

  The character ROM 275 stores the effect data as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable effect data storage area 276a and a stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  The variation effect data storage area 276a is a memory for storing variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol data storage region 276b is a third symbol display device. A memory for storing image data of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol data”) for constituting a stop symbol to be displayed at 81.

  In the present embodiment, one variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. As will be described in detail later, when the variation effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. A stop symbol (stop symbol data) is displayed every time (see S1310 and S1311 in FIG. 30).

  When the effect control device 117 receives the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 reads out the variation effect data of the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the received command from the character ROM 275. Then, it is stored in this variable effect data storage area 276a (see S1908 and S1909 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when a stop symbol command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, stop symbol data of a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the received command is read from character ROM 275 and stored in this stop symbol data storage area 276b. (Refer to S2114 to S2117 in FIG. 41).

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area 276a and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors and the like, a voltage of 12 volts, and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltages required by the control devices 110 to 114 are supplied to each.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203 and issues a payout initialization command for causing the payout controller 111 to clear the backup data. It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 24. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 17) that is activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 18) that is executed after the startup process, and a regular (this embodiment) In the form, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) activated at a cycle of 2 ms) and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal (see FIG. 24). First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing and main processing will be described.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switch reading processes are executed (S501). Here, for example, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read and provided in various winning ports (general winning port 63, specific winning port 65a, first winning port 64, etc.). When a winning is detected in the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the balls having the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 The updated value is stored in a second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and those counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment In the embodiment, when it reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the firing control process is performed on the condition that a touch switch (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 is detected and a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected. This is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In this start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance switch 208a is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 ( S651). In the processing of S651, if it is determined that the first entrance switch 208a is off and there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S651: No), this is performed without performing anything. The start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the state of the first entrance switch 208a is on and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (number of special figure holding balls N) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), the processing of S653 to S662 Each process is skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number N of special figure reservation balls) is less than 4 in the processing of S652 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Are stored in each of the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) updated by the processing of S653 is “1”, each storage area 203a1 to 203a3 of the hold first area has each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored. That is, if the special figure holding ball number N is “X”, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding X area.

  Next, a new winning lottery result is acquired based on the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e (S655). More specifically, if the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is on, the stored value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 are analyzed. As a result of the lottery, whether it is a “big hit” or “off”, if it is a big hit, “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, if it is out of place, the stop symbol is “rear out of front” or “out of front” It is acquired (read ahead) whether it is “non-reach” or “completely off”.

  Next, a winning information command indicating the acquired lottery result is output to the effect control device 117 (S656). Here, the winning information command is immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 18) of the main process. Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, if a winning information command is transmitted immediately, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at a maximum of about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the prize control device 117 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. The control burden can be distributed. In addition, the main control device 110 can separately transmit the incoming ball information command and other commands to the effect control means 117, so that it is possible to disperse the control burden as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  In this embodiment, the winning information command is output immediately. However, here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed, and the winning information command is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process at the execution timing of the next main process. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S655 is a big hit (S657). If the lottery result is a big hit (S657: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big win is a promising big hit (S658). . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S657: No), the process of S658 to S660 is skipped and the process proceeds to S661.

  In the process of S658, if the big hit is a probable big hit (S658: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to ON (S659). On the other hand, if the jackpot is a normal jackpot (S658: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to OFF (S660).

  Next, a hold number command is set (S661). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 203c (the special figure hold ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the production control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is indicated by the lighting state (S662). When the process of S662 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  According to the start winning process (S504) in FIG. 23 described above, when a winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected by the first winning slot switch 208a, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1) (Each value of .about.C3) can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored in the area with the smaller area number. Therefore, the data is given with the temporal winning order (winning order). Can be remembered.

  Further, a lottery result of data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the winning at the first entrance 64 is pre-read, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is output to the external output process (see FIG. It is possible to immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for S201 of 18). By immediately outputting (transmitting) the winning information command, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 earlier by about 4 ms at maximum. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Each time the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even if the lottery result is not acquired by waiting until the start of the fluctuating production corresponding to the new winning, when the new winning data is acquired, the lottery result is displayed in the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e. Analysis (prefetching) based on

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout / release control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing of the main controller 110 and the payout launch controller 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed in the payout / release control device 111 will be described. By such NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main controller 110, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and a wait process (in order to wait for the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) to become operable) 1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 of the main processing (see FIG. 18). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. On the other hand, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203 after transmission of the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 17) of the main controller 110 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 ms. It is processing. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to a sub-control device (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described above or the change of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the change start process (see FIG. 21) described later. Various commands such as a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, and an effect time addition command are transmitted to the effect control device 117 (necessary for display). Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. Then, when the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), A variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and a stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS 1 to CS 3 provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, a display control process for the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) in the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display unit 83 In FIG. 2, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the winning determination in the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time, and the ball Becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and changes. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to the sub-control devices (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S212). . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the initial value of the startup process (see FIG. 17) can be saved without saving the stack pointer value. In the process (S101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the fluctuation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation process (S204) of the main controller 110. The variation process (S204) is a process for starting the variation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (suspended) in the reserved ball storage area 203a. 18).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As for the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st symbol display device 37 in the case of the jackpot (that is, “probability jackpot”, “normal jackpot” two), and jackpot Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this fluctuation process (S204) is terminated without performing anything, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No) as a result of checking by the process of S304, S305 to S305. The process of S306 is skipped, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reservation ball storage area forward process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reservation ball storage area 203a to the reservation ball execution area 203b is performed. This is executed (S305), and a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  The reserved ball storage area progressive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, since this fluctuation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms. However, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), or if it is fluctuating (S302: Yes). Since the processes of S305 to S306 are skipped, the variable display is not started each time the variable process is executed, and the data corresponding to the pending winning is not consumed.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), this variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, the “high probability state ( Whether the symbol becomes “probable jackpot” or the symbol that becomes “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red from the start of variation until the variation time elapses, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S309). When receiving the stop command, the effect control device 117 ends the variable display being executed on the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, when the variation time elapses, the variation is stopped, and when the stop command is received, one variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) of main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is a process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 19). Process. This process is a process that is executed when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more.

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b (S351). In the process of S351, specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first per category counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first per category counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is converted into the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to.

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to the area (first to third area) having the smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 203c after the subtraction (special figure reservation ball number N) is shown. A hold number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the production control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is displayed in the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 19).

  Next, the variation start process (S306) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) of main controller 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the game is a big hit or miss based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result. It is a process for starting the change display, and is a process executed in the change process (see FIG. 19).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the first per-type counter storage area 203b2. And the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  And it is discriminate | determined based on the value of the 1st hit random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401 (S402). Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) at that time. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), “373,727” is the winning value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at the time of high probability (jackpot probability) Is a higher value than usual), “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733” is the winning value.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is, which jackpot of the two types of jackpot (“probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S401 Whether there is a hit type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 (“0 to 4”) is “0, 4” in the case of jackpot, “low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot ends” becomes “1 , 2, 3 ”,“ high probability state (probability jackpot) after jackpot ”is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S402 that the game is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode for the big win is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the process shifts to “a high probability state (probability big hit) after the jackpot end” or “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end”. Set When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off.

  Further, based on the transition state after the end of jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the effect control device 117. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit is ended by the process of S403.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S404). That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough symbol variation variation time is determined from normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), and special reach variation (60 seconds). At the same time, after the reach has occurred based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops ( In other words, the number of variable symbols) is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  The relationship between the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the variation time is preset by a table or the like. The variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that it is not a big hit (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b is set. Based on the value of C3, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be “rear out of front / rear”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, or “complete out”. In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), whether the special figure pending number counter 203c The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs according to the value (number of special figure holding balls N) and the like.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S406). That is, as in S404 described above, based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds), the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds), the special reach fluctuation (60 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation time of the rough symbol variation is determined from among the symbols, and the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) after the reach has occurred based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the symbol (medium symbol)) stops is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S405, if “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach) is always performed by the process of S406. A table is set in advance so that any one of (variation) is determined.

  When the process of S404 or the process of S406 ends, next, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, The variation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the addition / subtraction of the production time is performed according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is increased. 4 types of addition values are determined, i.e., when 2 seconds is added, and when the variable display time is subtracted 1 second.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the process of S410, a change direction command is set according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b (S411), the change start process (S306) is terminated, and the change process (FIG. 19) Return to Reference).

  The variable direction command set by the processing of S411 is a command that defines whether the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scroll or horizontal scroll. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, a change direction command corresponding to horizontal scrolling is set, and the first per-random number counter storage area is set. When the value of 203b1 is an odd number, a change direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the variation start process (S306) is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), A variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and a stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Here, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 18), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. In addition, before executing the change start process (S306), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the “holding number command” is set by the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), and then the “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” by the variation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the production control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command”, and “variation direction command”. Is done.

  Note that the “variation direction command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “variation direction command”. Further, the “variation pattern command” may include the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  In addition, these commands may be transmitted in a different order. Further, the order of command transmission may be changed to change the order of transmission. For example, if the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the production control device 117, the variation display is started before another command is transmitted, and the variation display is quickly performed. Can start. This is because the “pending number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  Further, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, 3) by executing the external output process (S201) once. For example, if the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, 6), the command is transmitted over two main processes (main process executed this time and main process executed next time). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at a time, it takes time to transmit and the main process may not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, the command may be transmitted from a command with a high priority. Specifically, as described above, the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, and thereafter, the “hold number command” and the “stop symbol command”. , “Calculation time addition command” and the like are transmitted over one or more main processes. Note that the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside by executing one external output process (S201) may be changed depending on the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, and the like. good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. The processing of the MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  Thereafter, a data backup process for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As described later in the processing of S917 of the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), in order to start paying out a winning ball or a loaned ball, permission to pay out a ball is set (S808). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the ball payout control, which is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 25) of the payout control device 111 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). This command determination processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to each command according to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and received here. For example, the command determination processing is transmitted from the main control device 110. When a payout return command, a payout initialization command, or a prize ball command is received, the payout of prize balls or lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet started up. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and when there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are saved to the stack area, or the initial setting process of the payout control device 111 without saving the value of the stack pointer (S801). In (see FIG. 25), the processing can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 41, the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 42 and 43, and the tables of FIGS. 44 to 48, each control executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. Processing will be described. The process of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and each time a command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. Command reception interrupt processing, and stop symbol pattern table update processing that continues updating the symbol pattern table until the power is turned off and then shut off.

  For convenience of explanation, first, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, an example of the conditions for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” displayed when the effect is started will be described. To do. Next, referring to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, conditions for increasing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed in the continuous chance effect production, and the final number of continuous display of “chance eyes” when increased An example will be described.

  Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern table update process will be described with reference to FIG. 31, followed by a command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33), a startup process (see FIG. 27), and a main process (see FIG. 28). Each process will be described in order. Each flowchart is a flowchart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′, and the middle symbol is displayed. The row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the lower symbol row Z3 by the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in the main controller 110, if the number N of special figure reservation balls at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of times of holding), A lottery result corresponding to each value of the counters C1 to C3 is prefetched, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Then, when the winning information command is received in the production control device 117, the production control device 117 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, and if it is determined to start the continuous chance eye effect, it is executed. In order to set the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed or to be executed as the “chance”, the stop symbol instruction storage table in the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is updated (update of setting values of each area, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to perform the consecutive chance effect is performed only when the result of the new winning lottery is “probable big hit”, “ordinary big hit”, or “back and forth outreach”. In addition, the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” scheduled at the start of the continuous chance effect production is the timing at which the production control device 117 receives the winning information command, the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command, and the stop symbol instruction. It depends on the combination with the contents of the storage table.

  Although details will be described later (see FIGS. 47 and 48), the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect is not fixed at the start of the continuous chance effect and may increase. More specifically, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, when the last fluctuation production becomes “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” During the last variation effect, “chance eyes” of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j are displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is 2 or more, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye effect increases.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, an example of a condition for starting a continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” displayed when the effect is started will be described. Each table in FIG. 44 to FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting values corresponding to the received winning information command are stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) The contents of the updated table are shown.

  First, FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received within a period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table. FIG. 44B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 44 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” when “setting value: out of” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: big hit (probability change)” is newly stored in one reserved area. Thereafter, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row on the right. This is because the winning information command is received within the changeable period. Further, “setting value: chance chance & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect being executed and the next (first scheduled execution) variation effect, so “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession in the continuous chance effect. Is done. That is, since the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect being executed, the “chance eye” is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect scheduled to be executed.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (probability change)” is newly added to the second holding area. When the table is updated, as shown in the second row in the right figure, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed three times in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 44B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 44 (b) receives a winning information command with a lottery result of “probability big hit” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: big hit (probability change)” is newly stored in one reserved area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed. This is because a winning information command was received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed, so the stop symbol of the running variation effect cannot be changed to “chance eye”, and the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) Even if only the stop symbol is changed to “chance eyes”, “chance eyes” cannot be displayed continuously, so that it is not possible to produce continuous chance eyes.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (probability change)” is newly added to the second holding area. And the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row in the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first reservation area, and the second reservation area. “Set value: chance chance & probability variation jackpot” is stored, and “set value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 45 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” is received within a period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table. FIG. 45B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 45 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in one reserved area. Thereafter, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row on the right. This is because the winning information command is received within the changeable period. In addition, “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, as in the case of the first stage in FIG. 44A, “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect being executed and the next (first scheduled to be executed) variation effect. In the chance eye production, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession. That is, since the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect being executed, the “chance eye” is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect scheduled to be executed. Hereinafter, the second stage and the third stage are described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row on the left, when “setting value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third holding area, “setting value: jackpot (normal) ) ”Is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row in the right figure, and“ setting ”is set in each area from the first reserved area to the third reserved area. “Value: Chance” is stored. Further, “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the next holding area.

  As a result, the “off chance symbol other than the chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and the “chance eyes” are displayed in each change effect from the next execution (scheduled to be executed first) to the fourth execution scheduled. Is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed four times in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, the fact that the stop pattern of the variable effect being executed does not become “chance eyes” means that the continuous chance eye effect is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the chance eye production is limited to a maximum of four times.

  FIG. 45B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 45 (b) receives a winning information command having a lottery result of “ordinary jackpot” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in one reserved area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed.

  This is due to the same reason as in the first stage of FIG. 44B, and since the winning information command was received during the period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed, This is because it is not possible to change to “eyes”, and as a result, it is not possible to produce continuous chance eyes.

  In addition, as shown in the second row in the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly added to the second holding area. And the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row in the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first reservation area, and the second reservation area. Stores “setting value: chance & normal jackpot”, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command having a lottery result of “out-of-front / reach reach” is received regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period.

  The first row on the left side of FIG. 46 receives a winning information command with a lottery result of “front / rear out of reach” when “setting value: out of” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: out (out of front and back)” is newly stored in the area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed.

  This is because, when a winning information command having a lottery result of “out-of-front / reach reach” is received, regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period, the stop pattern of the running variation effect is not changed, As a result, it is not possible to produce a continuous chance eye effect.

  Further, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: out (back and forth out)” is displayed in the second holding area. When the table is newly updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area as shown in the second row of the right figure. Then, “set value: skip after losing” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage is the same, and the description is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row in the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third holding area, “setting value: out (before and after) ”)” Is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed and “setting value: first skip” is stored in the first reserved area as shown in the fourth row in the right figure. “Set value: chance” is stored in each area from the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area, and “set value: skip after losing” is stored in the next reserved area.

  As a result, during the execution and the next (first scheduled to be executed) variation effect, “an off-chance pattern” is displayed, and in each variation effect from the second scheduled execution to the fourth scheduled execution. Each “opportunity” is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are displayed three times continuously in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, the first chance to stop the variation effect that is scheduled to be executed is not “chance”, when the continuous chance effect is executed and the final lottery result is “out-of-front / reach reach”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of three times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is set to “probable big hit (no limit)” and “normal big hit (up to four consecutive times). ) ”And“ out-of-front / reach reach (up to 3 consecutive times) ”. As a result, when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, the player is relieved according to the number of times the “chance eye” is continuously displayed, so that it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, conditions for increasing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed in the continuous chance effect production, and the final number of continuous display of “chance eyes” when increased An example will be described.

  Each table in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbols of each variation effect executed during the continuous chance effect. The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the stop symbols for each variation effect scheduled at the start of the consecutive chance effect, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) The content of the stop symbol of each variation effect after is changed is shown.

  As described above, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, when the last fluctuation production becomes “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation”, the last During the fluctuating effect, “chance eyes” of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j are displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is 2 or more, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye effect increases.

  First, FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, the display is scheduled. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of this stop symbol is changed. FIG. 47B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a stop symbol is changed.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 47 (a) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance”. In FIGS. 47 and 48, the fact that “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance” in one variation effect is described as “chance eye + probability big hit”. The “normal jackpot symbol” is also described in the same manner.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, any of “chance eye super variation A to D” (see FIG. 7) is used instead of the “super reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. It should be noted that the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display count selection counter 273j. For example, if the value when the chance eye display count selection counter 273j is referred to is “2”, the “chance eye” display count in the last variation effect is two.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “probable big hit symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed up to three times, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed continuously for a maximum of five times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 47B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, An example of the content of change when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 47 (b) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, any of “chance eye super variation A to D” (see FIG. 7) is used instead of the “super reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and thereafter “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern becomes “super reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right diagram.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed at most twice, and then “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum. In this case, the “chance” is not displayed at most three times in the last variation production, when the continuous chance production is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”, This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 48 (a) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, display is scheduled. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of this stop symbol is changed. FIG. 48B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern becomes “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a stop symbol is changed.

  The first row on the left side of FIG. 48 (a) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, any of “chance special variation A to F” (see FIG. 8) is used instead of the “special reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to four times in the last variation effect, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display count selection counter 273j. For example, if the value when the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is referred to is “3”, the display number of “chance eye” is three.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to four times. Is displayed. In other words, the “chance eyes” that were scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed continuously for a maximum of five times.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation production, “chance” is displayed up to four times, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed for a maximum of six consecutive times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 48B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern becomes “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, An example of the content of change when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 48 (b) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be 2 at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, any of “chance special variation A to F” (see FIG. 8) is used instead of the “special reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and thereafter “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j.

  In this case, the “chance eyes” are not displayed up to four times in the last variation effect. When the continuous chance effect is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”, This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed at most twice, and then “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  In this case, the “chance” is not displayed up to four times in the last variation effect, but as described above, the continuous chance effect is executed, and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, the last fluctuation production is “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach”. When “change” occurs, the number of continuous display of “chance” is increased. As a result, when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, the player is relieved according to the number of times the “chance eye” is continuously displayed, so that it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player. Note that the variation effect that increases the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” is not limited to the last variation effect, and any variation effect of any timing may be used as long as it is a variation effect in the continuous chance effect. Further, the variation effect for increasing the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” is not limited to one variation effect, and a plurality of variation effects may be performed.

  Next, each flowchart will be described. First, stop symbol pattern table update processing (see FIG. 31) will be described, followed by command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), startup processing (see FIG. 27), and main processing (see FIG. 28) in this order. To do. Each flowchart is a flowchart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′, and the middle symbol is displayed. The row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the lower symbol row Z3 by the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  First, stop symbol pattern table update processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol pattern table update process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol pattern table update process is a process for constantly updating the stop symbol pattern table stored in the stop symbol pattern table memory 273l from when the power is turned on until it is shut off (for example, every 5 ms). is there. In the stop symbol pattern table update process, a symbol pattern generation area update process is first executed (S2201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the symbol pattern generation area update process of the effect control device 117. The symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is a process for updating the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table, and is a process executed in the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 31). .

  In this symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201), first, 1 is added to the third area of the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2231). Next, it is determined whether the value of the third area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2232). If the value of the third area exceeds 18 (S2232: Yes), the value of the third area is the maximum value. This is a case where the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is exceeded. Therefore, the third area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the second area (S2233). On the other hand, in S2232, if the value of the third area is 18 or less (S2232: No), each process of S2233 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the second area exceeds 20 (maximum value) (S2234). If the value of the second area exceeds 20 (S2234: Yes), the value of the second area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2) is exceeded. Therefore, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area (S2235). On the other hand, in S2234, when the value of the second area is 20 or less (S2234: No), each processing of S2235 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table. The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the first area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2236). If the value of the first area exceeds 18 (S2236: Yes), the value of the first area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1) is exceeded. Therefore, the first area is cleared to 1 (S2237). On the other hand, in S2236, when the value of the first area is 18 or less (S2236: No), each process of S2237 is skipped, the symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table update process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the third area is incremented by 1, and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value, 1 is added to the second area, and the value of the second area is the maximum value. 1 is added to the first area, the area whose value is increased by 1 may be the second area or the first area. For example, if the value of the second area is increased by one, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value, the second area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value, the first area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the third area. When the third area reaches the maximum value, the third area is simply cleared to 1. Further, the value to be added is not limited to 1 and may be set arbitrarily. Further, a predetermined value may be added to each of the first to third areas.

  Also, a random number value (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the first area may be acquired and set as the value of the first area, or a random number value (in the range of 1 to 20) corresponding to the second area may be obtained. It is good also as a value of a 2nd area, and it is good also as a value of a 3rd area by acquiring the random value (with the range of 1-18) corresponding to a 3rd area.

  Here, it returns to description of FIG. When the symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is completed, it is next determined whether or not the updated symbol pattern generation area value indicates a stop symbol of reach chance (S2202). Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 corresponding to the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the value of the second area, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the value of the third area. It is determined whether or not the stop symbol combined with the symbol indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance.

  In the process of S2202, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a reach chance stop symbol (S2202: Yes), the symbol pattern generation area value is stored in the reach chance eye area in the stop symbol pattern table. (S2203). Specifically, the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the first area of the reach chance eye area, and the value of the second area of the symbol pattern generation area is similarly set to the value of the reach chance eye area. In the second area, the value of the third area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the third area of the reach chance area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2204.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach chance (S2202: No), the process of S2203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2204.

  In S2204, it is determined whether the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204). If the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204: Yes), Is stored in the front / rear reach area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2205). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2205 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / rear off Is determined (S2206). When the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / back deviation (S2206: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach area other than front / back deviation in the stop symbol pattern table ( S2207). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2207 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach symbol other than the back and forth deviation (S2206: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the probability variation big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not to show (S2208), and if the stop symbol of the probability variation jackpot symbol is indicated (S2208: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the probability variation jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2209). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2209 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the probability variation jackpot symbol (S2208: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol? (S2210), if the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol is indicated (S2210: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2211). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2211 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the normal jackpot symbol (S2210: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate a stop symbol with a chance to miss? Is determined (S2212), and when a stop symbol with a chance of losing is indicated (S2212: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the area of the chance of losing in the stop symbol pattern table (S2213). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2213 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the chance of losing (S2212: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol of a completely disconnected symbol. is there. Therefore, the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the complete deviation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2214). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2214 mentioned above.

  According to the stop symbol pattern table update process of FIG. 31 described above, the stop symbol pattern table can be constantly updated (for example, every 5 ms) from when the power is turned on until it is shut off. Since the value of each area in the stop symbol pattern table can always be updated, an irregular value is acquired every time the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, since the arrangement of the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to avoid the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to have high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has.

  In the stop symbol pattern table, various areas such as a probable jackpot area and a normal jackpot area are provided, but once the value of the symbol pattern generation area provided as a work area (third symbol arrangement information) ) And then the value is stored (copied) in the area corresponding to the updated value (probable jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.), so it is stored accurately in the desired area regardless of timing. The third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) can be acquired.

  For example, without providing a symbol pattern generation area, the value (third symbol arrangement information) of each area (probable big hit area or normal jackpot area) in the stop symbol pattern table is directly updated. In some cases, the desired third symbol arrangement information cannot be acquired. That is, if the value in the directly updated area is not a value corresponding to the area, the value in the area needs to be corrected to a correct value (updated again or moved to an appropriate area). However, if the value in the area is acquired before the processing is completed, the wrong third symbol arrangement information is acquired. In the present embodiment, the value of the symbol pattern generation area (third symbol arrangement information) is once updated, and then the value is stored in an area (probability variation jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.) according to the updated value ( Therefore, the third symbol arrangement information stored in the desired area can be obtained accurately regardless of the timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the effect control device 117. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a process executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. is there.

  In the command reception interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning information command is received (S1401). If a winning information command is received (S1401: Yes), whether or not the stop symbol setting flag 273h of the RAM 273 is on. Is determined (S1402). As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating a lottery result for a new winning.

  In the process of S1402, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1402: Yes), since a stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 41) described later is being executed, it waits until the flag is turned off. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is OFF (S1402: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set ON (S1403), and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process is executed (S1404).

  The stop symbol instruction storage table update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, but is a process for storing a set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. When the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is completed, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1406.

  On the other hand, if the winning information command is not received in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), the processes of S1402 to S1405 described above are skipped and the process proceeds to S1406. In the process of S1406, it is determined whether the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1406). If the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1406: Yes), the variation effect setting process is executed. (S1407).

  As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation time of variation effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), and the effect time addition command is an extension time or shortening time of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command. The variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, but is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect setting process (S1407) is completed, the process proceeds to S1408.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not a stop symbol command has been received (S1408). If a stop symbol command is received (S1408: Yes), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on as in S1402. Is determined (S1409). As described above, the stop symbol command is a command indicating a stop symbol pattern to be displayed in the variation effect to be executed.

  If the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on in the processing of S1409 (S1409: Yes), the above stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34) is being executed. To do. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1409: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to on (S1410), and the stop symbol setting process is executed (S1411).

  Note that the stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to be started. When the stop symbol setting process (S1411) is completed, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if the stop symbol command is not received in the processing of S1408 (S1408: No), the processing of S1409 to S1412 described above is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1413). If a stop command has been received (S1413: Yes), the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is terminated (S1414). Next, the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1415), and the setting value is “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: after deviation” It is determined whether it is “Skip” (S1416).

  Here, if the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit” or “set value: skip after miss” (S1416: Yes), the chance continuous number counter 273c of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0). (S1417) and the process proceeds to S1418. On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after losing” in the processing of S1416 (S1416: No), the processing of S1417 is skipped and the processing of S1418 is performed. Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when the stop symbol command is not received (S1413: No), each process of S1414-S1417 mentioned above is skipped, and it transfers to the process of S1418. In the processing of S1418, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1418). If another command has been received (S1418: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1419).

  For example, when a power-off command is received, the power-off occurrence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. Also, for example, if a hold number command is received, when the hold number display update process (see S1203 in FIG. 29) is executed, the same number of lamps as the number N of special figure hold balls indicated by the received hold number command Is a process of setting the special figure hold lamp 85 to be lit.

  On the other hand, if no other command is received in the processing of S1418 (S1418: No), the processing of S1419 described above is skipped, and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated.

  According to the command reception interrupt process of FIG. 33 described above, when a winning information command is received or when a stop symbol command is received, each stop symbol setting flag 273h is turned on until it is turned off. It is possible to wait for execution of processing according to the command. Further, when a winning information command is received or when a stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol setting flag 273h can be set to ON from the start to the end of the process related to the stop symbol.

  When the process according to the winning information command is executed, a new set value is mainly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the contents of the table are updated. Further, when the process according to the stop symbol command is executed, the stop symbol of the variation effect is set mainly based on the set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  For example, if a winning information command and a stop symbol command are received at the same timing, processing corresponding to each command is executed at the same timing, so one process refers to the contents of the stop symbol instruction table. During the process, the other process affects each other, for example, rewriting the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and as a result, there is a possibility that each process cannot be executed accurately.

  However, in this embodiment, even if the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to ON during the execution of one process. The other process is made to wait for execution. Therefore, the process can be executed accurately without affecting each other.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table update process (S1404) performed by MPU271 in the presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is a process for storing a set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stopping symbol instruction storage table, and is executed every time a winning information command is received. It is. This process is executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b of the RAM 273 (S1501). Next, a lottery result is extracted from the received winning information command (S1502). Here, as a lottery result, whether it is `` big hit '' or `` missing '', if it is a big hit, it is `` probable big hit '' or `` ordinary big hit '', if it is out of place, the stop symbol is `` rear out of front / rear '', `` It is extracted whether it is “reach other than front / rear out” or “complete out”.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted lottery result is “out” (S1503). If the extracted lottery result is “out” (S1503: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage in the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is stored. In the table, the setting value of the area for storing the setting value of the current winning is acquired (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit” or “set value: skip after miss” (S1505), and the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit”. Or, if “setting value: skip after losing” (S1505: Yes), since the setting value has already been set, the process proceeds to S1507 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after losing” (S1505: No), the setting value has not been set yet, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. In the process of S1503, when the extracted lottery result is “winning” (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the processing of S1506, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is set to the area corresponding to the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b among the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. (S1506). For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is “1”, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the first holding area. That is, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is “X”, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the Xth holding area.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 14C, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is “if the lottery result is“ rear out of front / rear ”,“ reach other than front / rear out ”, If the set value is “out” and the lottery result is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, then “set value: big hit”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the extracted lottery result is a “hit” (S1507). If the extracted lottery result is “hit” (S1507: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a “probable big hit” (S1508). If the lottery result is “probable big hit” (S1508: Yes), the probable big win winning process is executed (S1509), the stop symbol instruction storage table update process is terminated, and the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Return to). Note that the probability variation jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “probability variation jackpot” is based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. It is a process for determining.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” in the processing of S1508 (S1508: No), the regular jackpot winning process is executed (S1510), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is terminated, and the command is received. Return to the interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Note that the normal jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “normal jackpot” is based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. It is a process for determining.

  In the processing of S1507, if the lottery result is “displacement” (S1507: No), it is determined whether it is “rearward / rearward reach” (S1511). When the lottery result is “front / rear out of reach” (S1511: Yes), the front / rear out of reach reach winning process is executed (S1512), the stop symbol instruction storing table update process is terminated, and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 33). The back-and-forth losing reach winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but the stop symbol instruction storage table indicates whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “out (chance eye)”. It is a process for determining based on the content of.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not “rear out of front / rear reach” in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), this stop symbol instruction storage table update process is terminated without doing anything, and the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Return to).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the probability variation big win process (S1509) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the probability variation big win process (S1509) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation jackpot winning process (S1509) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “probability variation jackpot” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the stopped symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In this probability variation big prize winning process (S1509), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 44) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1601). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of “setting value: out” following the preceding area is counted from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored. The continuous number is set (S1602).

  Here, the “front area” indicates an area in a direction approaching the execution area. Specifically, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues to the front (see FIG. 44).

  Next, in the counted “setting value: out”, it is determined whether the setting value in the execution area is the foremost “setting value: out” (S1603), and the counted “setting value: out” If the set value of the execution area is the foremost “set value: off” (S1603: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the variation effect being executed. Therefore, in this case, first, it is determined whether “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1604). On the other hand, when the set value of the execution area is not the foremost “set value: out” among the counted “set value: out” (S1603: No), the stop pattern of the variation effect scheduled to be executed (not executed). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the process of S1604, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1604: Yes), the fluctuation effect being executed (that is, the reach effect) is being executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect. Prioritize continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1609. This is because the “super-reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” reach production generally has a higher game value production than the continuous chance eye production.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is not executed (S1604: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed. Then, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1605: No), since the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed, the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605: Yes), it is a case of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed. In this case, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1606). The stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed to “chance”. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′) that is changing at high speed is replaced, Stop symbol is changed to “Chance”.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) ends, next, 1 is added to the chance continuous number counter 273c (S1607). In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored to the execution area are changed to “setting value: chance” (S1608), The process proceeds to S1612.

  In the processing of S1609, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. The number of “off” is counted to determine the number of consecutive out (S1609). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1610).

  If the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1610: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained by using the variation effect of the previous winning (scheduled) and the variation effect of the current winning (scheduled). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the “setting value” that follows the preceding area from the area in which the previous winning setting value is stored is stored. : “Off” are all changed to “set value: chance” (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1610, when the number of consecutive continuations is less than 1 (S1610: No), this is a case where the continuous chance effect presentation cannot be started, so this probability variation big win winning process is terminated and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (FIG. 34).

  In the processing of S1612, “setting value: jackpot” of the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is changed to “setting value: chance chance & probability change jackpot” (S1612). ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize should be stored (S1613), and the probability variation jackpot winning process is terminated and stopped. The process returns to the symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the probability variation big win winning process (S1509) in FIG. 35 described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is “chance” as compared to the case where only the stop symbol of the variable effect to be executed is changed to “chance eye”. The amount that can be changed to “eyes”, that is, “chance eyes” can be displayed once more. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbols, even if the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are changing at high speed. The 3rd symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol (the main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. The stop symbol of can be changed to “Chance Eye”.

  Therefore, only when all three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the stop symbol is changed more than when changing the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to “chance”. A possible period (changeable period) can be secured for a long time. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is contained in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If column Z2 is changing at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in middle symbol column Z2, and change the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect to “chance” it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured.

  In addition, when normal reach fluctuation is being executed, the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are always the same. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so even after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, 5 seconds. If the third symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to the “chance eye”. Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance effect as long as the changeable period can be secured, compared to the case where the stop symbol during the change effect is changed to “chance”. Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol replacement process (S 1606) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance”, and the above-described probability variation big win winning process (see FIG. 35) and the normal jackpot mentioned later. This is a process executed in the winning process (see FIG. 37).

  In the stop symbol replacement process (S1606), first, it is determined whether the stop symbol set flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2301). If the stop symbol set flag 273i is off (S2301: No). This is a case where the stop symbol command has not yet been received and the stop symbol is not set. In this case, without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are changed together and the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”.

  That is, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) is obtained from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or missed chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table (S2302). The displayed third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2303). Next, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information of the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the stop symbol data storage area is obtained. It is stored in 276b (S2304). Then, the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON (S2305), and the stop symbol replacement process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the stop symbol set flag 273i is on (S2301: Yes), are all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed changing at high speed? Is determined (S2306). When all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stopped symbols in the variation effect being executed are changing at high speed (S2306: Yes), the third symbol is not replaced for each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are collectively changed, and the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2302.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2306, when not all of the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stopped symbols in the variation effect being executed are changing at high speed (S2306: No), that is, at least one symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3. Is displayed in a stopped state, or when the speed is changing at low speed (medium speed fluctuation), the third symbol arrangement information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S2307). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information are respectively acquired (S2308).

  Then, it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is a deviation variation (S2309). If the variation effect being executed is other than a deviation variation (that is, a normal reach variation) (S2309: No), it is acquired. It is determined whether the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information is a reach chance (symbol) (S2310). When the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information is the reach chance (symbol) (S2310: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol is unnecessary, and thus this stop symbol replacement process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information is other than the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2314.

  In the processing of S2309, when the variation effect being executed is a deviation variation (S2309: Yes), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in S2308 have the same symbol (main symbol). (S2311). When the same symbol is present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S2311: Yes), the symbol symbol Z1 and Z3 are common to the symbol symbol rows Z1 and Z3 from the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in the processing of S2308. Then, one existing third symbol (the same main symbol) is selected (S2314). Then, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the processing of S2308 is replaced so that the chance symbol is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2315), and the process proceeds to S2316.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2311, when there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S2311: No), the third symbol (main symbol) is selected from the upper symbol row Z1 acquired in S2308. One is selected (S2312). Then, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 are replaced so that the chance symbol is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2313).

  Next, the 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information which shows the stop symbol (chance eyes) newly comprised by replacement | exchange of a 3rd symbol is memorize | stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2316). Then, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced in the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2317). Specifically, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed). ) Only the stop symbol data corresponding to the portion is overwritten in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the stop symbol replacement process is terminated, and the process returns to the probability variation jackpot winning process (see FIG. 35) or the normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 37).

  According to the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) of FIG. 36 described above, when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed has not yet been set, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed. When Z3 is changing at high speed, all symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are changed and stopped without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The design has been changed to a chance. Therefore, the third symbol to be replaced is determined for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 (in the symbol row unit), and the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z2 are arranged so that the third symbol falls within each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. It is not necessary to replace the third symbol every Z3 (in symbol row units). Therefore, since the stop symbol can be changed to a chance by a simple process, the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S2317, only the stop symbol data of the part changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Therefore, the stop symbol data of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in which the low speed fluctuation (or medium speed fluctuation) is started. Without affecting the stop symbol data, it is possible to replace (change) only the stop symbol data of the non-stop-displayed symbol strings Z1, Z2, and Z3. Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed while accurately stopping and displaying the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed has not yet been set, and when each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed is changing at high speed. And all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, Z3 are collectively changed, and the stop symbol is changed to chance, but the third symbol to be replaced for each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 is determined, The stop symbol may be changed to a chance by replacing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  In addition, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (third symbol), only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced to minimize the change of the third symbol row. The stop symbol has been changed to a chance. Therefore, since the process for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, if there is the same symbol (third symbol) in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, only the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol is regarded as a chance. However, the stop symbol may be changed to the chance by replacing the third symbol row Z3 and the third symbol row Z2 respectively.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of arrow X in the figure) will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′. In addition, the middle symbol row Z2 may be replaced with the middle symbol row Z2 ′, and the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  FIG. 42 illustrates an example of replacing the third symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and FIG. An example of replacing the third symbol only in the middle symbol row Z2 among the three middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, an example of replacing the third symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described. FIG. 42A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m after the third symbol is replaced (after change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), “11” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “11” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” are sequentially displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 from left to right. "Is displayed.

  Similarly, the middle symbol row Z2 includes a symbol row arranged in order from left to right, “Angkou (6)”, “shellfish”, “Dugong (7)”, and the lower symbol row Z3 includes a left symbol row. In order from the right to the right, a symbol row along with “shellfish”, “turtle (3)”, and “shellfish” is displayed. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate stop symbols that are completely out of symbol displayed in the variation of out.

  As described above, when the deviation variation is executed, and there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the low symbol variation of the lower symbol row Z3 is started (less than 9 seconds). The stop symbol can be changed until. Here, in order to change the stop symbol, one third symbol (main symbol) must be selected from the upper symbol row Z1, but there is only “shark” in this stop symbol. Therefore, in this case, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced so that “shark” enters the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, respectively.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (9)", "shell", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right. Further, the lower symbol row Z3 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (9)", "shellfish", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right.

  When the symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are replaced in this way, the symbol “shark” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. Since it enters, the stop symbol becomes a chance.

  If the stop symbol can be changed to the chance, the array number “5” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and the changed lower symbol row Z3 is indicated. The array element number “5” is stored in the third area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, a chance item is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for stopping the variation effect being executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the deviation variation is executed and the same symbol is present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, before the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (10 The stop symbol can be changed until less than a second). The description of the replacement of the third symbol is the same as that of the third symbol and is omitted.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol is replaced so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3 so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. You can go. Further, for example, when there are two main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 so that the stop symbol becomes a chance by one of the main symbols. Can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, an example in which only the middle symbol row Z2 of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is replaced with the third symbol will be described.

  FIG. 43A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m after the third symbol is replaced (after change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), “11” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “10” is stored in the second area, and “6” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” are sequentially displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 from left to right. "Is displayed.

  Similarly, in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol rows arranged in the order of "shellfish", "angko (6)", and "shellfish" in order from left to right, and in the lower symbol row Z3, from left to right. In order, a symbol row along with “shell”, “shark (4)”, and “shell” is displayed. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate the stop symbols of the reach symbols other than the front and rear deviations displayed in various reach fluctuations. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed to the chance only when the deviation fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation is executed, and it is assumed here that the normal reach fluctuation is executed.

  As described above (see FIG. 12), when the normal reach variation is being executed, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol always have the same symbol (main symbol), and the middle symbol row Z2 If it is less than 5 seconds even after the low-speed fluctuation is started, the third symbol of the non-stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 can be changed.

  Here, in order to change the stop symbol, it is necessary to select one same third symbol (main symbol) from the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. "There is only. Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that “shark” enters the middle symbol row Z2. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined with “shark (4)”, “shell”, and “octopus (1)” in order from left to right.

  When the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced in this way, the symbol “shark” is placed in the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, the stop symbol becomes the reach chance.

  If the stop symbol can be changed to the reach chance, the array element number “19” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, a chance item is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for stopping the variation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol may be replaced so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. Also, for example, when two identical main symbols are included in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the stop symbol becomes an opportunity by either one of the main symbols, What is necessary is just to change the symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) of the effect control device 117. The normal jackpot winning process (S1510) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “normal jackpot” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the stopped symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In the normal jackpot winning process (S1510), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 45) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1701). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of “setting value: out” following the preceding area is counted from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored. The number is continuous (S1702). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive continuations is 4 (maximum value) (S1703). If the number of consecutive continuations is 4 (S1703: Yes), each area from the execution area to the third reserved area is set to “ This is a case where “setting value: out” is stored, and “setting value: winning (normal)” is stored in the fourth reserved area. Here, when the chance chance effect is started and the “chance eye” is displayed from the variation effect that is being executed, the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” in the chance chance effect is 5 times or more. The stop pattern of the change production is not changed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1709. That is, since the final lottery result is “ordinary jackpot”, the process proceeds to S1709 in order to limit the number of continuous display of “chance” to a maximum of four times.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1703, when the number of consecutive continuations is other than 4 (any one of 0 to 3) (S1703: No), the set value of the execution area is the forefront in the counted “set value: out”. It is determined whether or not “setting value: out of” (S1704). Among the counted “setting value: out”, when the setting value in the execution area is the foremost “setting value: out” (S1704: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the variation effect being executed. First, it is determined whether “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1705).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when the set value of the execution area is not the foremost “set value: out” in the counted “set value: out” (S1704: No), the execution is scheduled (not executed). Since it is a case where only the change effect stop symbol is changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the processing of S1705, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1705: Yes), the execution of the fluctuation effect being executed (that is, the reach effect) rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect. Prioritize continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1709. This is because, as described above, the “super reach variation” or “special reach variation” reach effect generally has a higher gaming value than the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is not executed (S1705: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed. Then, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1706: No), since the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706: Yes), it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed. In this case, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1606). Note that the stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 36) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance” as described above. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′) that is changing at high speed is replaced, Stop symbol is changed to “Chance”.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) ends, next, 1 is added to the chance number continuous number counter 273c (S1707). In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored to the execution area are all changed to “setting value: chance” (S1708), The process proceeds to S1712.

  In the processing of S1709, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. The number of “off” is counted to determine the number of consecutive out (S1709). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1710).

  When the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1710: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained by using the variation effect of the previous winning (scheduled) and the variation effect of the current winning (scheduled). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the “setting value” that follows the preceding area from the area in which the previous winning setting value is stored is stored. : "Off" are all changed to "set value: chance" (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1710, if the number of consecutive continuations is less than 1 (S1710: No), this is a case where the continuous chance winning effect cannot be started. 34).

  In the processing of S1712, the “setting value: jackpot” of the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is changed to “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” (S1712). ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize should be stored (S1713), and this normal jackpot winning process is terminated and stopped. The process returns to the symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) in FIG. 37 described above, as in the case of the probable big winning prize process (see FIG. 35), only the stop symbol of the variable effect scheduled to be executed is changed to “chance”. In comparison, it is possible to display the “chance eye” as many times as possible, that is, the amount of change that can be changed to the “chance eye” for the change effect being executed. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbols, even if the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are changing at high speed. The 3rd symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol (the main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. The stop symbol of can be changed to “Chance Eye”.

  Therefore, only when all three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the stop symbol is changed more than when changing the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to “chance”. A possible period (changeable period) can be secured for a long time. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is contained in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If column Z2 is changing at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in middle symbol column Z2, and change the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect to “chance” it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured.

  In addition, when normal reach fluctuation is being executed, the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are always the same. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so even after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, 5 seconds. If the third symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to the “chance eye”. Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance effect as long as the changeable period can be secured, compared to the case where the stop symbol during the change effect is changed to “chance”. Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the front / rear reach reach winning process (S1512) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the front / rear reach reach winning process (S1512) of the effect control device 117. The back-and-forth losing reach winning process (S1512) is a process for determining whether to start a continuous chance stage effect whose final lottery result is “out (chance)” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the above-described stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In this front / rear miss reach winning process (S1512), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 46) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1801).

  Next, in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: deviation” following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored. Are counted as the number of consecutive deviations (S1802). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead. Here, as in the process of S1602 in FIG. 35 and the process of S1702 in FIG. 37, the “lot value: out” of each area up to the execution area is not counted because the final lottery result is This is because the stop symbol being executed is not changed in the case of a continuous chance effect that is “out (chance)”.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 3 (maximum value) (S1803). If the number of consecutive continuations is 3 (S1803: Yes), each area from the first reserved area to the third reserved area Is stored in the fourth reserved area, and “set value: out (previous back and forth)” is stored.

  Here, when the “chance eye” is displayed from the variation effect scheduled to be executed first after the continuous chance eye effect is started, the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” in the continuous chance eye effect is 4 times, and 3 times. Will be exceeded. Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed first is not “chance”. Therefore, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: out” of the first reserved area is changed to “setting value: first skip” (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, when the number of consecutive continuations is other than 3 (any one of 0 to 2) (S1803: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1805). When the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1805: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained using the variation effect of the previous winning (to be executed) and the variation effect of the current winning (to be executed). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, when the number of consecutive misses is less than 1 (S1805: No), this is a case in which the continuous chance effect production cannot be started, so this front / back miss reach winning process is terminated and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process ( Return to FIG.

  In the processing of S1806, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. All “off” are changed to “set value: chance” (S1806). Then, “setting value: skip after losing” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storing table (S1807). The process returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-described front / rear miss reach winning process (S1512) in FIG. 38, “setting value: skip after losing” can be set in the area for storing the set value of the next winning in the stop symbol instruction storage table. . Therefore, because the stop symbol of the next variable effect after the continuous chance effect production has ended can be a stop symbol other than “chance eye”, the final chance result is “out (chance eye)”. Is executed, it is possible to reliably limit the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” to 3 times.

  For example, after the end of a continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), another continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession) is executed. Then, it seems as if the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance” was performed six times in a row. However, in the present embodiment, since the stop pattern of the next fluctuation effect after the continuous chance eye effect has been finished can always be a stop symbol other than “chance eye”, the continuous chance eye effect is executed continuously. Can be prevented.

  In addition, for example, after the end of the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), the final chance that the final lottery result is “normal jackpot” (for example, “Chance” Even when “eye” is displayed four times in succession, it appears as if the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol “chance eye” is performed seven times in succession. However, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the continuous chance effect from being continuously executed for the same reason as described above, so that the continuous chance effect can be accurately executed. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the changing effect setting process (S1407) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the changing effect setting process (S1407) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect setting process (S1407) is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, each time a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command are received. It is a process to be executed. This process is executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In this variation effect setting process (S1407), first, the variation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is set to ON, and the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to OFF (S1901). As described above, the variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. The stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the changing effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command and effect time addition command, and stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (S1902). As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation time of the variation effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), and the effect time addition command is the extension time or shortening time of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command.

  Next, the set value of each area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by one area in the direction of the execution area (forward) (S1903). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead. That is, the setting value of “first holding area” is shifted to “execution area”, and the setting value of “second holding area” is shifted to “first holding area”. In the same manner, the setting value of “third holding area” is set to “second holding area”, the setting value of “fourth holding area” is set to “third holding area”, and the setting value of “next holding area” is set to “ Shift to the “fourth reserved area”.

  In the present embodiment, the data (setting value) is shifted only for the area where the setting value is stored. Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed in the area where the set value is not stored, the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, the data (setting value) of each area may be shifted to the area ahead by one area regardless of the presence or absence of the setting value. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored in each area, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b (S1904), and the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is acquired (S1905). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S1906), and the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & chance hit & If it is “probable variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” (S1906: Yes), pseudo-variation setting processing is executed (S1907).

  The pseudo-variation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. However, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable big hit” or “normal big win”, the fluctuation of the last variation effect is changed. This is a process for deciding whether to increase the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” based on time. When this pseudo variation setting process (S1907) ends, the variation effect setting process ends, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1906, when the acquired setting value is other than “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S1906: No), the variation of the variation time memory 273d Fluctuation effect data corresponding to time is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S1908). The obtained variation effect data is stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S1909).

  Next, it is determined whether the variation time of the variation time memory 273d is a variation time of an outlier variation or a normal reach variation (S1910). If the variation time is a variation time of an outlier variation or a normal reach variation (S1910: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to ON (S1911), the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when the fluctuation time is a fluctuation time other than a deviation fluctuation or a normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the process of S1911 is skipped, the fluctuation effect setting process is terminated, and the command reception Return to the loading process (see FIG. 33).

  39, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g can be set to ON only when the deviation fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation starts to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1907) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of the effect control device 117. The pseudo-variation setting process (S1907) is performed based on the variation time of the last variation effect when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable variation jackpot” or “normal jackpot”. This is a process for determining whether to increase the number of continuous displays. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 39).

  In this pseudo variation setting process (S1907), first, the variation time stored in the variation time memory 273d of the RAM 273 is acquired (S2001), and the obtained variation time is the variation time of “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”. Is determined (S2002). In addition, as described above, in the variation production in which the winning lottery result is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation ( The variation effect of any pattern is selected from each pattern of “60 seconds)” (see FIG. 21).

  In the process of S2002, when the obtained fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: Yes), instead of the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), the chance normal fluctuation (20 seconds) ( This is a case of executing FIG. Note that the number of continuous display of “chance” is not changed. In this case, 1 is stored in the pseudo change chance display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 (S2003), and change effect data of “chance eye normal change (20 seconds)” is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S2004), and S2012. Move on to processing.

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k is used when “chance eye normal change”, “chance eye super change A to D”, or “chance eye special change A to F” is executed. This is a memory for storing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is not the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: No), the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j in the RAM 273 is acquired and the value is obtained. Are stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k (S2005).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is “chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2006). When the set value of the execution area is “chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2006: Yes), the total value of the value of the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-variable chance eye display number memory 273k is 4. It is determined whether it exceeds (S2007).

  When the total value of the value of the chance number consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-variable chance number display number memory 273k exceeds 4 (S2007: Yes), the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. In the continuous chance production, the number of continuous display of the “chance” exceeds 4 times, so it is limited to a maximum of 4 times. Therefore, “the value of the 4-chance consecutive number counter 273c” is calculated, and the result is stored in the pseudo-variable chance display number memory 273k (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when the set value of the execution area is “chance eye & probability change big hit” (S2006: No), each process of S2007 and S2008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2009. In addition, in the process of S2007, when the total value of the value of the chance continuous number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k is 4 or less (S2007: No), the process of 2008 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S2009.

  In the process of S2009, it is determined whether or not the acquired variation time is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)” (S2009), and the obtained variation time is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”. In some cases (S2009: Yes), instead of the super reach variation (40 seconds), any one of the chance eye super variations A to D (40 seconds) (see FIG. 7) is executed. Note that there is a possibility that the number of continuous display of “chance” will increase.

  In this case, one piece of variation effect data for displaying the same number of “chance eyes” as the value stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275 “chance eye super variation A˜. D ”is obtained from each variation effect data (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2012.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when the acquired variation time is the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)” (S2009: No), it is replaced with the special reach variation (60 seconds), instead of the chance special variation A. ~ F (for 40 seconds) (see FIG. 8) is executed. Note that there is a possibility that the number of continuous display of “chance” will increase.

  In this case, one piece of variation effect data for displaying the same number of “chance eyes” as the value stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k and “chance eyes special change A˜” stored in the character ROM 275 are displayed. F ”is obtained from each variation effect data (S2011), and the process proceeds to S2012.

  In the process of S2012, the fluctuation effect data acquired in the process of S2004, the process of S2010, or the process of S2011 is stored in the fluctuation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S2012), and the pseudo-variation setting process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 39).

  According to the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of FIG. 40 described above, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable big success” or “normal big success”, the variation time of the last variation production is “ If the fluctuation time of “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)” or the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, it is possible to increase the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes”. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuating effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small and the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” is small, the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, the player improves the sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state each time the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” increases. As a result, the player increases the number of continuous display of “chance eyes”. In response, you will be angry. Therefore, a highly interesting game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, even when the number of variation effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small, the number of variation effects executed apparently increases, so that the variation effect in the continuous chance effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a player having a monotonous impression of a game and to provide a game with high interest.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the last variation effect is the variation time of “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”, the variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, “special reach variation ( 60 seconds) ”, and one of“ chance eye normal fluctuation ”,“ chance eye super fluctuation A to D ”, and“ chance eye special fluctuation A to F ”is executed. Yes. On the other hand, only when the variation time of the last variation production is the variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)” and the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, “normal reach” is at least once. It may be configured such that the number of continuous display of “chance” is increased after “variation (20 seconds)” is executed. Specifically, if the variation time of the last variation production is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, one of “chance eyes super variation B, C” is executed, If the variation time of the last variation effect is the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, one of “chance eye special variation B to E” is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of continuous display of “chance” and to execute “normal reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” at least once. As mentioned above, normal reach fluctuations and super reach fluctuations each generate reach and perform flashy effects, giving players a sense of expectation for a gaming state that is advantageous. The combination of the increase in the number of continuous displays and the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state can further enhance the player's expectation. Therefore, the expectation given to the player can be changed depending on whether the number of consecutive display of “chance” is increased or not, so that the player is monotonous with the game. It is possible to avoid having an impression and provide a game with high interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the stop symbol setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or starts to be executed, and is executed every time a stop symbol command is received. It is processing. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol setting process (S1411), it is first determined whether or not the stop symbol set flag 273i of the RAM 273 is ON (S2101). As described above, the stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the variation effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Here, the case where the stop symbol set flag 273i is already ON means that the winning information command is received before the stop symbol command within the changeable period after the execution of the variation effect is started. This is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started (or being executed) is set to “chance eye”.

  If the stop symbol set flag 273i is on in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the above-described stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 36) is executed, and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is already set. In this case, the stop symbol setting process is terminated without doing anything, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the stop symbol set flag 273i is OFF in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S2102). .

  Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2103), and the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance chance” If “Eye & Probability Bonus” or “Set Value: Chance Eye & Normal Bonus” (S2103: Yes), the final lottery result is “Continuous Bonus” or “Normal Bonus”. This is a case where the stop symbol of the last variation effect is set.

  In this case, the third symbol arrangement information (first chance area or reach chance eye area) from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or missed chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table by the value in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k of the RAM 273. (Information indicating the arrangement of the three symbols) is acquired (S2104). Note that, as described above, the stop symbol pattern table is constantly updated (eg, every 5 ms) from when the power is turned on until it is shut off, so the value of each area (arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) Every time information is acquired, an irregular value is acquired.

  For example, in the process of S2104, only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reaching chance” may be acquired, or only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “missing chance” may be acquired. Further, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance” and the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “off chance” may be acquired. In this way, it is possible to change the “chance eyes” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance eye effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression of the game. It is possible to avoid and provide a game with high interest.

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k indicates that the chance effect normal change, the chance eye super-changes A to D, or the chance eye special changes A to F are executed. This is a memory in which the number of continuous display of “chance” is stored. Normally, in the case of a fluctuating production where the lottery result is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds) ) ”Is selected from among the patterns (see FIG. 21). However, since the final lottery result this time is the last fluctuation effect of the continuous chance eye effect that is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, as described above (see FIG. 40), normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation Instead of each of the special reach fluctuations, any one of the chance normal fluctuations, the chance super fluctuations A to D, or the chance special fluctuations A to F is executed.

  Next, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to each third symbol arrangement information acquired in the processing of S2104 is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 Each is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2305). Then, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2106), and among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), the area corresponding to the extracted stop symbol pattern The third symbol arrangement information is acquired from (S2107). In other words, in the process of S2107, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “probability variation jackpot symbol” or “normal jackpot symbol” is acquired.

  Next, the acquired third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2108), and the stop symbol data necessary for configuring the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m. (Image data of the third symbol) is acquired from the character ROM 275 and added to the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 and stored (S2309). Thereby, the stop symbol data of “chance eyes” and “probability big hit symbol” or “normal jackpot symbol” displayed in the last variation effect are stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  In the process of S2106 described above, the stop symbol pattern is acquired from the received stop symbol command. However, even if the set value acquired in S2102 is used, the final stop symbol is “probable big hit symbol” or “normal big hit symbol”. Therefore, the stop symbol pattern may be extracted based on the set value acquired in S2102 instead of the received stop symbol command.

  Then, the value of the pseudo-changing chance display number memory 273k is added to the chance continuous number counter 273c (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2118. In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2103, when the acquired setting value is not “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2103: No), the acquired setting value is It is determined whether or not “setting value: chance chance” (S2111). If the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance chance” (S2111: Yes), 1 is added to the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c (S2112), and the chance eye area (reach) in the stop symbol pattern table is reached. The third symbol arrangement information is acquired from the chance eye area or the missed chance area (S2113).

  For example, in the process of S2113, whether the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “miss chance eye” or the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance eye” is acquired according to the variation effect pattern being executed. . More specifically, if the variation effect pattern being executed is “outside change (11 seconds)”, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “outside chance” is acquired. Further, if the variation effect pattern being executed is “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”, “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, or “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, it corresponds to “reach chance”. The third symbol arrangement information is acquired.

  In this way, it is possible to change the “chance eyes” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance eye effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression of the game. It is possible to avoid and provide a game with high interest. Note that only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reaching chance” may be acquired, or only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “missing chance” may be acquired. Further, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance” and the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “off chance” may be acquired.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: chance” in the processing of S2111 (S2110: No), it is a case where the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command may be set as it is. In this case, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2114). Here, from the stop symbol command, one of the following symbols is extracted as a stop symbol pattern: “rear out of front / rear”, “reach other than front / rear out”, “complete out”, “probability big hit”, or “normal big hit”.

  Next, among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), the third symbol arrangement information is acquired from the area corresponding to the extracted stop symbol pattern (S2115). Then, the acquired third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2116), and stop symbol data (in order to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m) ( 3rd image data) is acquired from the character ROM 275 and stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2317).

  Thereby, stop symbol data which is image data of a stop symbol displayed in the variation effect is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the process proceeds to S2118. In the process of S2118, the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON (S2118), the stop symbol setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  When the stop symbol command is received by the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of FIG. 41, based on the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol pattern indicated by the received stop symbol command. Thus, it is possible to set a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to start executing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the stop symbol instruction storage table is provided. Therefore, when setting the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being executed or is to be started, simply set the stop symbol instruction storage table. An appropriate stop symbol can be set by referring to the setting value of the execution area and referring to the received stop symbol command only when necessary. In other words, every time a stop symbol command is received, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” that should be displayed in the continuous chance effect, the number of “chance eyes” displayed continuously after the start of the continuous chance effect, etc. Based on this situation, it is not necessary to make a determination to determine the stop symbol of the current variation effect and set an appropriate stop symbol. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, but this is stopped, and a counter that counts the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” to be displayed in the continuous chance effect or a continuous chance effect A counter that counts the number of “chances” that have been displayed continuously since the start of the program is provided, and each time a stop symbol command is received, the variation effect of this time is based on the status of various counters. A determination to determine the stop symbol may be made and an appropriate stop symbol may be set.

  Next, referring to FIG. 27, a startup process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, the power-on notification process is performed to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process is completed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275 and the video RAM 276 is displayed. (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1004).

  Next, the power-off process in progress flag is turned on to determine whether the current start-up process was executed because the MPU 271 was reset during the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) described later. It is determined based on whether or not it is present (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, but when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command, the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received is stored in the RAM 273 and the power-off process ( Step S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. Note that if the power supply is completely shut off during execution of the power-off process or after completion of the execution, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after any of the following three states. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As a second state, a power interruption process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. , MPU 271 has been reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1011.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1011.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because an instantaneous power failure has occurred, but the power is cut off. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  Next, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1009). . By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1010), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  In the process of S1011, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1011). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely shut down (see S1117 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: Yes), the work area of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117 (S1012), the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt is permitted. Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 273 corresponds to the memories 273a to 273k of the RAM 273.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost). RAM 273 without resetting only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like and turning on the power-off flag (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Is stored.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: No), S1012 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1013, the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1014, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clear process in S1012 is skipped is that when only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the work area data in the RAM 273 is not cleared but saved. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued. For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main process of the effect control device 117. The main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as sound output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 27) of the effect control device 117 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed. Process.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) (S1101), and after the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed, If 1 msec or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), an audio lamp effect process is executed (S1102). Note that the audio lamp effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but is mainly a process for executing lighting control of various lamps and audio output control. When the sound lamp effect process (S1102) is completed, the process proceeds to S1103.

  On the other hand, if 1 msec or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) was executed (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103. The process of S1101 determines whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed, because the process of S1102 is mainly related to lamp lighting control and audio output control. This is because it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 1 msec).

  In the process of S1103, it is determined whether 20 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed (S1103), and 20 m after the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed. If more than one second has elapsed (S1103: Yes), a variation effect process is executed (S1104). The variation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). When this variation effect process (S1104) ends, the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if 20 milliseconds or more have not elapsed since the previous determination (the processing of S1103) was executed (S1103: No), the processing of S1104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1105. The process of S1103 determines whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the previous determination was performed. The process of S1104 is based on the variation time of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). This is because it is a process to update in response, and therefore it is not necessary to execute it in a short cycle (within 20 milliseconds).

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g of the RAM 273 is on (S1105). 273e is updated (S1106). As described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is a flag that is turned on only during a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. Therefore, if the flag is on, the variable effect is always executed. . Further, a deviation variation or a normal reach variation is always executed (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 39).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation time counter 273e is equal to or longer than the maximum changeable period (see FIG. 12A) corresponding to the variation effect being executed (S1107), and the value of the variation time counter 273e is the maximum value. If it is longer than the changeable period (S1107: Yes), it is a period in which the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed cannot be changed, and the process proceeds to S1112. In other words, in the process of S1107, it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed is a deviating effect for 10 seconds or longer, and if the normal reach variation is 15 seconds or longer.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if the value of the variation time counter 273e is less than the maximum changeable period corresponding to the variation effect being executed (S1107: No), it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is out of variation. Determination is made (S1108). If the variation effect being executed is other than deviating variation (that is, normal reach variation) (S1108: No), the stop symbol can still be changed. Transition.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect being executed is out-of-range (S1108: Yes), the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S1109). Then, it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information. (S1110) If there is the same symbol (S1110: Yes), it is still possible to change the symbol that stops the deviation variation, so the processing of S1111 to S1112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1113.

  On the other hand, if there is no identical symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S1110: No), it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 whether the upper symbol row Z1 has stopped (S1111). When the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped (including during medium speed fluctuation and during low speed fluctuation) (S1111: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to OFF because the stop symbol of outlier fluctuation cannot be changed. Then (S1112), the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when the upper symbol row Z1 is changing at high speed in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111: No), since the stop symbol of the deviation fluctuation can be changed, the process of S1112 is skipped, and the process of S1113 Transition to processing.

  In the process of S1113, the chance number display number selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is updated (S1113), and it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1114). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1114, when the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1114: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption process flag are turned on (S1116), and the power interruption process is executed (S1117). . After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output to the audio output device 226, the electrical decoration units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81. Turn off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  In the process of S1114, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1114: No), whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 (see the process of S1009 in FIG. 27). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1115: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1115 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 273 is destroyed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is good also as what performs notification of RAM destruction.

  Next, an audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the sound lamp effect process (S1102) of the effect control device 117. The sound lamp effect process (S1102) is mainly a process for executing lamp lighting control and sound output control, and is a process executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1205 described later. (S1201). Then, the customer waiting effect process of S1202 is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1203). In the customer waiting effect process, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen. Further, in the hold number display update process, the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command transmitted from the main controller 110 and received.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1204). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current variation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production gives a sense of expectation to the jackpot It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1204 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1205), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1206). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1206, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1207), the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and received. The lamp editing process in S1205 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1206 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the changing effect process (S1104) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating effect process (S1104) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect process (S1104) is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) described above. Process.

  In the variation effect process (S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot is being hit) (S1301). If it is medium (S1301: Yes), the jackpot presentation process is executed (S1302). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round (for example, the effect data is read from the character ROM 275 for each round, and the predetermined number in the video RAM 276 is set. Write to the area). After the big hit effect process (S1302) ends, the variable effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the changing effect is being executed (fluctuating) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1303). (S1303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is ON (S1304). As described above, the variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from main controller 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  If the variation start flag 273f is OFF in the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), other display processing is executed (S1313), and this variation effect processing is terminated. The other display process is, for example, a display process such as an effect of waiting for a customer to be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when the fluctuation start flag 273f is on (S1304: Yes), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f is turned off (S1305). Then, the variation time counter 273e of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0), the variation time count is started (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1308. As described above, the variation time counter 273e is a counter that stores an elapsed time since the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the changing effect is being executed (changed) (S1303: Yes), the value of the changing time counter 273e is updated (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not it is within the variation effect time by checking whether or not a stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S1308). For example, if it is between the start of the variation effect and the reception of the stop command, it is determined that it is within the variation effect time.

  In the process of S1308, when it is determined that the time is within the variation effect time (S1308: Yes), it is determined whether it is the stop symbol display time (S1309). For example, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the variation time counter 273e has reached the stop symbol display time set for the variation effect being executed, and when the elapsed time becomes the stop symbol display time, the stop symbol is displayed. It is determined that it is time to display.

  In the processing of S1309, if it is not the stop symbol display time yet (S1309: No), the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is used by using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276. ) Displays an image corresponding to the fluctuation effect data (fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) (S1310). As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation, and stop is image data of a stop symbol. This is performed based on the symbol data. Then, when the process of S1310 is completed, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if it is the stop symbol display time in the processing of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 is used by using the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276. The stop symbol is displayed on the (LCD) (S1311). Then, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the processing of S1308, when it is not within the variation effect time (S1308: No), that is, when the variation effect time is over, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is suspended (S1312). For example, the display of a new image on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the displayed image remains displayed without change. When the process of S1312 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  Through the above-described variation effect process (S1104) of FIG. 30, a moving image (image) and a stop symbol corresponding to the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, a variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) can be performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. Specifically, when the variation effect is started, first, the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a is read, and an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. Each time the stop symbol display time is reached, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is read and the stop symbol is displayed.

  That is, since the data used for one variation effect is stored in different storage areas 276a and 276b, and read out as necessary, it is within the variation effect time and before the display time of the stop symbol If so, the stop symbol data once set (stored) after the start of the variation effect can be rewritten (overwritten) with another stop symbol data. Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to “chance”.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to the “chance eye”, and furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol during the fluctuating production can be changed to “chance” during the fluctuating production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation production is the fluctuation time of “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, or With the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuating effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small and the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” is small, the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, the player improves the sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state each time the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” increases. As a result, the player increases the number of continuous display of “chance eyes”. In response, you will be angry. Therefore, a highly interesting game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, even when the number of variation effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small, the number of variation effects executed apparently increases, so that the variation effect in the continuous chance effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a player having a monotonous impression of a game and to provide a game with high interest.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of the horizontal scroll is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a part of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbol is displayed. Even after the symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 or lower symbol row Z3) is stopped and displayed, the third symbol of the symbol row that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol that is changing is changed to “chance”. However, after all of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced so that the stopped symbols become “chance eyes”. For example, as soon as all the stopped symbols are displayed, an effect of exchanging all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed, or an effect of exchanging only some of the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed. With this configuration, the stop symbol can be changed even after the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, so that the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period) can be ensured the longest. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chance of performing the continuous chance effect. The same applies to the case where the vertical scroll variable display is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the variation effect data used for the variation effect and the stop symbol data used for the display of the stop symbol are stored separately, and the symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol is “chance”. The stop symbol data is changed so as to be “eye”, and the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are scroll-displayed (fluctuated) so that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed are stopped. The remaining time until the stop symbol is displayed without storing the data is acquired, and when the remaining time elapses, the symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is displayed in the scroll display so that it stops at the “chance eye”. The symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 may be changed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display is horizontally scrolled in the third symbol display device 81, the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are configured to be displayed. The number of symbol columns is not limited to three, but may be one or two, or four or more. Similarly, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the number of symbol columns may be other than three.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is executed, the variation effect in which the stop symbol becomes “chance” is continuously executed, but the stop symbol is “chance”. An effect in which the fluctuating effect is intermittently executed may be performed as a continuous chance eye effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the determination whether to perform a continuous chance eye effect is performed in the effect control apparatus 117, it is determined whether the main control apparatus 110 performs a continuous chance eye effect instead. It is good also as composition which performs judgment. In the main control device 110, when it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is performed, the transmission / reception of the winning information command is unnecessary, so the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 The number of command receptions can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce both the control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, whenever the winning information command is received in the production | presentation control apparatus 117, the setting value according to the lottery result which the received winning information command shows is memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table. Although configured, it may be configured to store setting values that can identify each lottery result. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “front / rear out of reach”, “setting value: front / rear out of reach” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Similarly, “reach other than front / rear out of reach” for “reach other than front / rear out”, “set value: complete out” for “complete out”, “set value: probable big hit” for “probable big hit”, If it is “normal jackpot”, “setting value: normal jackpot” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. With this configuration, the stop symbol pattern can be identified by referring to the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. Therefore, every time a new variation effect is started, a stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol of the variation effect is issued. There is no need to send or receive. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced by both the main control device 110 and the production control device 117.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is ended with “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”, when the last change effect is started, one or more “chance eyes” are started. Is displayed, and then the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed. The stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” may be displayed by performing an effect as usual.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery result of the new winning is “normal jackpot”, and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). If “setting value: out” is stored from the execution area to the third reserved area in the stop symbol instruction storage table in order to limit the display of “chance” to a maximum of four consecutive times. Furthermore, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is not changed. Instead, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eyes”, and then the stop symbol of each variable effect from the first time to the third time is also changed to “chance eyes”. Then, in the stop pattern of the fourth variable effect, which is the last variable effect, the “chance eye” is displayed by simply displaying the stop symbol corresponding to “normal jackpot” without displaying the “chance eye”. May be limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit (no limit)” and “normal big hit (up to 4 consecutive times)”. However, the maximum value may be set arbitrarily. However, the maximum value may be arbitrarily set.

  In the above embodiment, after the end of the continuous chance effect, another continuous chance effect is not performed. However, the continuous chance effect may be performed continuously. . For example, when consecutive chance chance effects are performed continuously, each successive chance effect is continuously executed, so that the total number of “chance eyes” displayed as if they are consecutive is the subsequent consecutive Do not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the final lottery result of the chance eye production. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance production is “probable big hit”, the number of continuous display of “chance eye” is not limited. If it is “reach or missed chance”, the maximum is 3 consecutive times. As a result, the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as the “chance” increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the sound effect during the changing effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal changing effect. This sound effect allows the player to recognize that the continuous chance stage production is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. Furthermore, after setting the stop symbol as “chance eye”, the effect sound during the dynamic effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol, etc.) May be changed to a different sound effect.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the lighting parts 29 to 33 during the change effect and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (the aspect of the dynamic display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal change effect. Since the player can recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced by the lighting pattern different from the normal, it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. In addition to setting the stop symbol as “chance eye”, the lighting patterns 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (mode of dynamic display) during the variation production are also in the normal variation production. You may change to a different pattern.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above embodiment, a variable effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”. It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the aspect of the dynamic display effect is the same) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be performed successively in a predetermined order. By this special variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance effect production of the above embodiment, a variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye (missing chance eye, reach chance eye)” is continuously performed. The sound (the mode of sound effect of dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) is changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal variation effect, or the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamps during the variation effect. The 34 lighting patterns (modes of dynamic display effects) may be changed to patterns different from those during normal fluctuation effects, or special fluctuation effects different from normal may be continuously performed. Moreover, you may carry out combining each two or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, control of audio output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure where the 1st entrance 64 was provided as an entrance where a jackpot determination is started, this 1st entrance may be two or more. . And it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect) in accordance with the first entrance where the game ball has won.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when determining the production pattern (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, complete out) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, based on the counter value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Although determined, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not provided, and the determination is made based on the counter values of the other counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, and variable type counters CS1 to CS3). You may comprise so that it may do. The effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes one counter value of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, a counter value of the first random number counter C1, and a counter of the first type counter C2. Or the counter value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the counter value of the first per-type counter C2. May be determined.

  Further, in the first random number counter C1 in the above embodiment, the numerical value in the range of 0 to 738 is counted, but the range to be counted may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 2 bytes (a range that can be counted by 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 that is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes may be counted, or 0 to 32768 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Similarly, the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment counts a value in the range of 0 to 4, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 counts a value in the range of 0 to 238. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count the numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 1 byte (the range that can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are composed of 1 byte, numerical values in the range of 0 to 255, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte, may be counted. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1” and other bits have a bit value of “0”) may be counted.

  Here, when the probability is calculated using the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and the one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only for every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set for every 0.1%. That is, the wider the counting range, the easier the fine adjustment of the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common to produce models with the same variation effect and jackpot effect but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine so that you can easily fine-tune the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily made for each model, and the design burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although comprised so that the pending | holding number command may be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the production | presentation control apparatus 117, you may comprise so that a pending | holding number command may not be transmitted. That is, in the production control device 117, the special figure reservation ball number N is stored in the special figure reservation ball counter 273b of the RAM 273, so that the special figure reservation ball number N can be known without receiving the reservation number command. That is, in this case, the same number of lamps as the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b are configured to be lit in the special figure reservation lamp 85. As a result, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the effect control device 117 can be reduced, thereby reducing both the control burden on the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117. Can do.

  In the above embodiment, the “variable direction command” is provided. However, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like not provided with the “variable direction command”. In the above embodiment, the “calculation time addition command” is provided, but the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like that is not provided with the “calculation time addition command”.

  In the embodiment described above, the main control device 110 determines the changing effect and the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 A fluctuating effect or a notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. For example, the effect control device 117 determines a changing effect or a notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command is received. When the effect control device 117 determines the changing effect or the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure holding lamp 85 displays the number of holds for the first entrance 64. You may or may not do it. In the case where the hold number is not displayed, the number of transmissions of the hold number command in the main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85. However, without providing the special figure reservation lamp 85, the special figure reservation ball number N is displayed in the third symbol. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, the display is performed so that the number of holdings is visually distinguishable (for example, a number or a four-divided area is displayed as a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) that is different by the number of holdings). To do. In addition, the special figure reservation ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85, and the special figure reservation ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it comprised so that a prize to the 1st entrance 64 could be held at maximum 4 times, the maximum hold frequency is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special figure reservation ball number N of the first entrance 64. However, the counter 203c is not provided and the counter 203c is provided as necessary. (For example, at the start of a change), the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted) so as to obtain the special figure reserved ball number N of the first entrance 64. You may comprise. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead, it may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as an L-shape. Moreover, you may scroll diagonally. Further, it may be scrolled immediately before. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and it is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information is specific, and in this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown. Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information in the event that the display means is in control; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entry, the lottery information transmission means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and the entrance information Take by acquisition means And a dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means. The control means includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means, and lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means. A lottery information receiving means, a mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, and a lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means. In such a case, a change permission determination unit that determines whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode based on the content of the mode information storage unit. The first change means for changing the dynamic display mode being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode when the change permission determination means determines that the change is possible, and the first change For each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by means, the dynamic display is executed in the predetermined mode, or the dynamic display is different from the dynamic display instead of the dynamic display. A gaming machine A1 comprising a predetermined mode executing means for executing a plurality of target displays in the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, the main control means acquires the entrance information associated with the entrance by the entrance information acquisition means, and based on the entrance information. The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means. Instructed to the peripheral control means by the display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed in the display means by the dynamic display execution means. In addition, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the mode information indicating the mode of dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is stored in the mode information storage unit. Based on the contents of the mode information storage unit stored, whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change possibility determination unit. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Further, for each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the predetermined mode execution means, the dynamic display is executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display is replaced with the dynamic display. A plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner.

  Since the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the execution starts. In the peripheral control means, the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means, so the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is It is possible to change to a predetermined mode during execution of dynamic display. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased. Further, the predetermined mode execution unit causes the dynamic display to be executed following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit to be executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display to be executed subsequently. Instead, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, compared with the case where dynamic display is executed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is changed and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in the predetermined manner. In some cases, the dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be executed one or more times. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of continuously changing the dynamic display mode to the predetermined mode and increase the number of executions of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode.

  In the gaming machine A1, the peripheral control means includes effect information storage means for storing effect information in which effect details of dynamic display executed by the display means are defined, and the predetermined mode execution means is the effect A gaming machine A2 characterized in that a plurality of dynamic displays are executed from the dynamic displays defined by the effect information stored in the information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the peripheral control means stores the effect information in which the contents of the dynamic display effect executed in the display means are stored in the effect information storage means, and the predetermined mode execution means A plurality of dynamic displays are executed from the dynamic displays determined by the effect information. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare special production information and store it in the storage area just to execute a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display changed by the second changing means. Therefore, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the effect information includes dynamic display effect contents that increase the player's expectation and dynamic display effect contents that are different from the dynamic display. The predetermined mode execution unit is configured with the execution time, and the predetermined mode execution unit is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit to execute the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first change unit. And an execution determination unit for determining whether or not each of the plurality of dynamic displays including the dynamic display for enhancing the player's expectation can be executed within the instructed dynamic display execution time, When it is determined that the execution is possible by the execution determination unit, a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation is included instead of the dynamic display that is instructed to execute by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit. Multiple dynamic display it Gaming machine A3, wherein are those to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the production information includes dynamic display production contents that increase the player's expectation and dynamic display production contents that are different from the dynamic display. If the execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the instructed dynamic display is executed. Whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays including a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation can be executed within the time is determined by the execution determination unit. If it is determined that execution is possible, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a plurality of dynamic displays including a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation Each display is executed by predetermined mode execution means. Therefore, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a dynamic display that always increases the player's expectation is executed when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation, and moreover, since a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the contents of the dynamic display can be varied. Therefore, a player is executed when the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed as it is and when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed instead of the instructed dynamic display. Since the level of expectation given to the player can be changed, it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, each time the peripheral control means receives the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, the aspect information indicating the state of the unexecuted dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information, When the execution of dynamic display is instructed by the aspect information storage execution means stored in the aspect information storage means in association with the reception order of the lottery information and the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the execution is instructed. The mode information corresponding to the displayed dynamic display is acquired from the mode information storage unit based on the reception order of the lottery information and the mode information is acquired based on the mode information acquired by the mode information acquisition unit. Execution mode setting means for setting the mode of dynamic display instructed to be executed by the automatic display instruction means, and the predetermined mode execution means is determined to be changeable by the change permission determination means. And a second changing unit that changes each of the unexecuted dynamic display mode information stored in the mode information storage unit to mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, each time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the peripheral information control unit stores the mode information indicating the unexecuted dynamic display mode corresponding to the lottery information. If the means is stored in the mode information storage unit in association with the reception order of the lottery information and is determined to be changeable by the change availability determination unit, the mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage unit Are respectively changed by the second changing means to the mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Then, when execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means, the aspect information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed to execute is transmitted from the aspect information storage means based on the reception order of the lottery information. The execution mode setting unit sets the dynamic display mode acquired by the acquisition unit and instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction unit based on the mode information. Therefore, when execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed to execute is simply acquired, and the dynamic instructed to execute based on it is acquired. The display mode can be set. That is, it is necessary to set an appropriate mode by judging the situation such as whether the dynamic display mode is continuously set to a predetermined mode every time execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit. Since there is no control burden, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A4, if one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit changes or sets the mode information in the mode information storing unit, the other of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit The game machine A5 is characterized in that the mode information is changed or set after the completion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, if one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit is changing or setting the mode information in the mode information storing unit by the other of the second changing unit and the mode information storing executing unit, After that is finished, change or set the mode information. Therefore, while the mode information in the mode information storage unit is being changed or set by one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit, the mode information being changed or being set is erroneously changed to the second change. It can be prevented from being changed or set by the other of the means and the mode information storage execution means. Therefore, accurate mode information can be stored in the mode information storage means.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the mode of dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display whose mode is changed to the predetermined mode by the second changing unit is limited to a mode different from the predetermined mode. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it includes an aspect limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the mode of the dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display whose mode has been changed to the predetermined mode by the second changing unit is changed to a mode different from the predetermined mode. Limited by. Therefore, when execution of dynamic display is instructed next to each dynamic display whose mode is changed by the second changing unit, the dynamic display is executed in a mode different from the predetermined mode. In addition, while the dynamic display is being executed, even if it is determined that the dynamic display mode being executed by the changeability determination unit can be changed to a predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode being executed is It is executed without change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display mode from being continuously changed to the predetermined mode after the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode. Can be prevented from continuing continuously.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the main control means obtains information on the number of pieces of entry information stored in the entry information storage means separately from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that it has a pitch information transmission means for sending to the peripheral control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the main control means, in addition to the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means, information related to the number of pieces of entry information stored in the entry information storage means is input to the peripheral control means. It is transmitted by the number transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the lottery information and the information related to the number of the entry information stored in the entry information storage means, the processing for each information can be executed at different timing. , The control burden can be distributed. Moreover, since the main control means can separately send the lottery information and the information related to the number of entry information stored in the entry information storage means to the peripheral control means, compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing, The control burden can be distributed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. A gaming machine A8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A8, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. The player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and can attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display effect mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine provided with dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information in the event that a game medium has been entered by the detecting means, Entry information acquisition means for acquiring entry information, lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entry based on the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and the lottery information A mode information storage unit that stores mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a pitch information storage unit that stores the pitch information acquired by the pitch information acquisition unit; The dynamic display executing means includes The dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the content of the incoming ball information storage means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the content information of the aspect information storage means If the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode, the changeability determination unit determines whether the change can be changed by the changeability determination unit. First dynamic means for changing the dynamic display mode being executed by the display execution means to the predetermined mode, and each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first change means And a predetermined mode executing means for executing the dynamic display in the predetermined mode, or executing a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display in the predetermined mode instead of the dynamic display. Iko Game machine A9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A9, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means. When the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the entrance lottery result is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information, and the lottery information corresponding to the lottery information is obtained. The mode information indicating the display mode is stored in the mode information storage unit. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage unit, the change possibility determination unit determines whether the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. Then, based on the execution time of the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the second changing unit, the execution determination unit determines whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display whose mode has been changed can be executed. . If it is determined that the execution is possible by the execution determination unit, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the changed dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner in place of the dynamic display changed by the second changing unit. Executed by means.

  Since the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means, the mode of dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined before the start of the execution. However, since the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing means, the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is changed to the dynamic display. Can be changed to a predetermined mode during execution. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased. Further, the predetermined mode execution unit causes the dynamic display to be executed following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit to be executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display to be executed subsequently. Instead, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, compared with the case where dynamic display is executed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is changed and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in the predetermined manner. In some cases, the dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be executed one or more times. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of continuously changing the dynamic display mode to the predetermined mode and increase the number of executions of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to games. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entry, the lottery information transmission means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and the entrance information By acquisition means Entry information storage means for storing the acquired entry information, and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the entry information storage means. The peripheral control means displays a dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information when the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means instructs execution of dynamic display of identification information. Is capable of recognizing the identification information by the dynamic display execution means that is executed on the display means in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display that is executed by the dynamic display execution means. After such a configuration, the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means and the stop display executing means for stopping and displaying the plurality of identification information that are dynamically displayed on the display means are received. When the lottery information is received by the selection information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing means or the plurality of identification information by the dynamic display executing means. If a part of the identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in the difficult recognition manner by the dynamic display executing means. Changeable determination means for determining whether or not it can be changed to a predetermined mode, and when the changeability determination means determines that the change can be made, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the display in a difficult-to-recognition mode. The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode, the stop display of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first change means is terminated, and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information And a second changing means for controlling the predetermined information as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means when executed. B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and based on the entrance information The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically displays the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the dynamic display mode being executed is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, The plurality of pieces of identification information that are dynamically displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display executing means. When the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing unit or by the dynamic display executing unit. When some of the identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means. Whether the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.

  Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display executing means includes a first to nth series of a plurality of pieces of identification information when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. Dynamic display of identification information sequences up to (n is an integer of 2 or more) is executed in the display means in units of identification information sequences, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences. If the stop display mode of the identification information is the predetermined mode when the stop display is performed and the stop display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit, The first to n-th identification information strings are stopped and displayed for each identification information string in the order of the first to n-th identification information strings, and the changeability determination means is selected by the lottery information reception means. When receiving the dynamic If the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed in a difficult-to-recognize manner by the display execution means, it is determined that the stop display aspect of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined aspect, and the first change means When the change enable / disable determining unit determines that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information sequences dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed to a predetermined mode. A gaming machine B2 that is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit, the first to nth (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are connected. The dynamic display executing unit displays the identification information sequence up to the identification information sequence unit by the dynamic display executing unit, and thereafter the first to nth identification information sequences are the first to nth identification information. Stop display is performed by the stop display execution means for each identification information column in the order of the columns. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and stopped, the identification information stop display mode is assumed to be a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the identification information stop display mode Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the changeability determination means. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is executed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Or, even if the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, it is recognized. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information strings during dynamic display in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Can do. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the first to nth identification information sequences stopped and displayed in the display areas of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, the identification information columns may be arranged in the vertical direction and arranged side by side in the order, the identification information columns may be arranged in the horizontal direction and arranged in the order in the vertical direction, The information columns may be arranged in an oblique direction, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned on the straight line.

  In the gaming machine B2, the change permission determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether or not the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, the identification information determining means determines that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display executing means If the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize aspect, it is determined that the stop display aspect of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined aspect, and the second changing means When it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode. Characteristic gaming machine B3

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the identification information determining unit determines that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. If the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, it is determined by the changeability determination means that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Is done. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings is performed in the order of the first to nth identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When it is executed for each identification information sequence, after each of the first to (n-1) th identification information sequences is stopped and displayed, or in a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. Even if it is dynamically displayed, if it is within the period in which the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the n-th identification information sequence being dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner The mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined manner. It can be a period. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner, and then the nth identification information sequence is stopped. A first dynamic display capable of executing a change process for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means before the display, and the (n-1) th identification information string. The second dynamic display incapable of executing the changing process by the first changing means after the dynamic display in the recognizable mode until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The dynamic display execution means executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the change possibility determination means has the first to (n) -1) Determine whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information sequence When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings by the identification information determining unit. Then, if the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in the dynamic display of the identification information, after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first changing means and the (n-1) th identification information string in a manner that allows recognition. A second dynamic display in which the change processing by the first changing means cannot be executed during the period from the initial display until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed is provided. Either one of the display and the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the change information determination means determines that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, the nth identification information sequence is displayed after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Since the change processing for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means can be executed until the display is stopped, the nth identification information is displayed before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The column identification information can be changed reliably. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information columns is stopped and displayed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be surely changed to a predetermined mode before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the first change means sets the stop display mode of the identification information to the predetermined mode. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, the first change means changes to the stop display mode of the identification information. Can also reduce the control burden.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the game machine includes an array information storage unit that stores array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order, and the one identification information string includes: The stop display execution unit corresponds to the one identification information sequence of the identification information array indicated by the arrangement information, corresponding to a part of the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information. A range information storage unit that stores one range information indicating a range of consecutive arrays for each of the first to nth identification information columns is provided, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information. After that, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the display means stops and displays each identification information of the identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is stored in the array information storage means. This corresponds to a part of the continuous arrangement of the identification information shown. In addition, one range information indicating the range of the continuous array corresponding to one identification information string among the array of identification information indicated by the array information is range information storage means for each of the first to nth identification information strings. And after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information of the identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means is stopped and displayed on the display means. Stopped by the execution means. Therefore, when identifying each identification information of each of the first to nth identification information strings to be stopped and displayed, one range information indicating the range of the array corresponding to one identification information string is first to first. Since each of the identification information strings up to n can be stored, for each of the first to nth identification information strings, information individually indicating each identification information included in the identification information string and the arrangement of the identification information The amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where information indicating the order is stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the stop display execution means includes identification information acquisition means for acquiring the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, and the plurality of identification information acquisition means acquired by the plurality of identification information acquisition means. Identification information storage means for storing identification information, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information stored in the identification information storage means is stored in the display means. The first change means, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination means, the dynamic display execution means among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means is acquired by the identification information acquisition means, the acquired plurality of identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, and the stored plurality of identification information is stored. The identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Further, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. Then, the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing unit. Therefore, since only the identification information that has not been stopped and displayed can be changed by the first changing means among the plurality of identification information stored in the identification information storage means that is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means, the stop display is executed. The identification information can be changed without affecting the identification information in the middle and the identification information that has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode while accurately displaying the stop display of the identification information.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means A dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display executing means Stop display executing means for causing the display means to stop and display a plurality of pieces of dynamically displayed identification information after the player has made the aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information as the mode of dynamic display being executed. In the gaming machine having the above, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring the entrance information accompanying the entrance, and the entrance information acquisition means Enter entry information The ball entry information storage means and the dynamic display execution means execute dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means. When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball based on the incoming ball information, If the dynamic display is executed in a recognizable manner by the stop display or the dynamic display execution means, the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed. A changeability determination unit that determines whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the dynamic display execution unit that recognizes the recognition when the changeability determination unit determines that the change can be changed The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first change unit is terminated, and thereafter And a second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing unit when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instruction means in the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information. After the execution of the dynamic display mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information items are stopped on the display means. The display execution means stops the display. In addition, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information, and the lottery information is acquired. In addition, when a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner in which a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit by the stop display execution unit, the dynamic display execution unit By changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the changeability determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.

  Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (examples of game machines)
64 1st entrance (an example of entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (an example of display means)
110 Main control device (an example of main control means)
117 Production control device (an example of peripheral control means)
203a Reservation ball storage area (an example of entrance information storage means)
208a First entrance switch (an example of detection means)
S306 An example of dynamic display instruction means S654 An example of entrance information acquisition means S655 An example of lottery information acquisition means S656 An example of lottery information transmission means S1104 An example of dynamic display execution means S1107 to S1112, S1605, S1107 to S1112, S1706 An example of availability determination means S1110 An example of identification information determination means S1311 An example of stop display execution means S1401 An example of lottery information reception means S1606 An example of first change means S1608, S2111, S2113, S1708, S2111, S2113 An example of second change means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.

  In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, when a plurality of variation effects to be started are reserved when a game ball wins a start opening, this continuous effect is performed for the plurality of variation effects held.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, in order to perform a continuous effect, there are two or more reserved variable effects, so there is a problem that a continuous effect cannot be performed when only one variable effect is reserved.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can be increased to a predetermined mode such as a continuous performance .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects a display means for displaying identification information, a entrance into which a game medium enters, and an entrance of the game medium into the entrance. A detection means, a peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means when the detection means detects a ball entering a game medium, and controls the peripheral control means, Main control means for performing control, and the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information for acquiring the entrance information associated with the entrance The lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance, and the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means, the entrance information acquisition means, and the lottery information acquisition means Send to peripheral control means Selection information transmission means, entrance information storage means for storing entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the control means, and the peripheral control means includes a plurality of pieces of identification information when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. Dynamic display of the identification information sequence from the first to the nth (n is an integer of 2 or more) that are consecutive in the display means in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information in units of identification information sequence After the display execution means and the mode of dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means are changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of pieces of identification information displayed dynamically are displayed. The first to nth identification information And stop display execution means for stopping displayed in the display unit for each of the identification information sequence columns from the first in order of identification information sequence of the n, the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of said main control means When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the second identification information string in a manner that is difficult to recognize. lever, said dynamic display by the execution unit can be changed to the recognition difficult dynamic displayed by changing the identification information has stopped display mode certain aspects of the identification information in a manner and determines whether to change judging means The stop table of the second to nth identification information sequences that are dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner by the dynamic display execution means when the changeability determination means determines that the change is possible The first change means for changing the display mode to a predetermined mode in which the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information strings and stopped and displayed, and the mode is changed by the first change unit The predetermined mode is selected as the stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means when the stop display of the identification information is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Second identification means for controlling the identification information, and the dynamic display of the identification information includes the (n-1) th identification information string being dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner and the nth A first dynamic display capable of executing a changing process for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first changing means until the identification information string is stopped and displayed; The identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner. Until the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, and a second dynamic display that cannot execute the changing process by the first changing means is provided, and the dynamic display executing means Executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the changeability determination means stops the identification information strings from the first to the (n-1) th. An identification information determination unit that determines whether or not the same identification information exists in the display mode is provided, and when the lottery information is received by the lottery information reception unit, the identification information determination unit performs the first to (n−1) th ) Until the same identification information exists in each identification information sequence until the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means, the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode. It is determined that the change is possible .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the opportunity to make a predetermined mode.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reservation ball storage area, and a reservation ball execution area. (A) is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the pattern of a normal fluctuation production | presentation, and the content of the production | production, (b) is for describing an example of a chance eye normal fluctuation | variation and the content of the production | production. FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the chance eyes | supermarket variation AD and the production content. It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of chance eyes special fluctuation | variation AF, and the production content. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is scrolled horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is vertically scrolled. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a miss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, (c ) Is a schematic view showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the maximum changeable period memory of an effect control apparatus, (b) is the schematic which shows the outline of the maximum changeable period of a deviation | shift fluctuation, (C) is the schematic which shows the outline of the maximum changeable period of a normal reach fluctuation | variation. It is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of an effect control apparatus. (A) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the relationship between the setting value memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table, and a stop symbol (C) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. (A) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol pattern table which is updated. (A) is schematic which shows an example of the content of a display symbol pattern memory, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus corresponding to the content of a display symbol pattern memory. . It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area sequential advance process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process of the main controller and the payout controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production process of an production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol pattern table update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol pattern generation area update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table update process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the probability variation big prize winning process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol replacement process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal jackpot winning process of the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the back-and-forth losing reach winning process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change production setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo | simulation variation setting process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process of an effect control apparatus. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory before replacing the 3rd symbol (before change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content, (b) It is the schematic which showed an example of the content of the display symbol pattern memory after changing 3 symbols (after change), and an example of the stop symbol corresponding to the content. (A) is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "probability big hit" within the period (changeable period) in which a stop symbol can be changed. Yes, (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probability big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed. (A) is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" within the period (changeable period) in which a stop symbol can be changed. Yes, (b) is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command having a lottery result of “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table at the time of receiving the winning information command whose lottery result is "back and forth reach" regardless of whether it is a changeable period. (A) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance stage production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last fluctuation production is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a symbol is changed, (b) is the pattern of the last variation | production effect when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye effect is "normal jackpot". It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when it becomes "super reach fluctuation | variation (40 seconds)" and the content of the stop symbol of a display plan is changed as a result. (A) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, the display schedule is stopped. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a symbol is changed, (b) is the pattern of the last variation | production effect when the final lottery result of a continuous chance eye effect is "normal jackpot". It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when it becomes "special reach fluctuation | variation (60 second)" and the content of the stop symbol of a display plan is changed as a result.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b which are light emitting means.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in a lit state, and the gaming state of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, in a short time, or in a normal state, Whether or not the state is changing is indicated by the lighting state. For example, the 1st symbol corresponding to “probable big hit”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “ordinary jackpot”, the 1st symbol corresponding to “out”, and the number of reserved balls are lit. Indicated by status. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display.

  In this pachinko machine 10, three lottery results are provided as “probable big hit” of the first symbol, “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, and “miss” of the first symbol as the jackpot lottery results. . Then, when winning the first entrance 64, whether the first symbol is “probable big hit”, the first symbol “ordinary jackpot”, or the first symbol “out” A lottery will be held.

  As a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 has a “probable big hit” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and the game state is easily shifted to the special gaming state. The probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a game state. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability change (probability change state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol becomes a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance The electric accessory attached to 64 is in an open state for a predetermined time, so that the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “short-time (short-time state)”, and states other than the probability change (probability change state) and the short-time (short-time state) are referred to as “normal state (normal state)”.

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases around the time.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is “disconnected” in the first symbol, the state of the game that is neither probabilistic nor short in time (the state where neither the first symbol jackpot probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up) Become.

  In the present embodiment, the “probability jackpot” of the first symbol is a jackpot whose maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and then the jackpot of the first symbol (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The interval is a jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the 1st symbol means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the 1st symbol shifts to a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), and a predetermined fluctuation The jackpot (16R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased only for the number of times (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal big hit” of the first symbol is achieved, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). However, instead, it may be configured to continue increasing the winning probability of the second symbol until the next lottery result of the first symbol is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first symbol “probability big hit” or the first symbol “ordinary big hit” is set, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, but the number of rounds is an arbitrary number (for example, , 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). Further, the number of rounds may be different between the “probability big hit” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be 16 rounds in the case of “probability big hit” of the first symbol, and the maximum number of rounds may be eight rounds in the case of “normal jackpot” of the first symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “probability big hit” of the first symbol is reached, the probability of winning the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the big jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. However, instead of this, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be increased only for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the following description, the “probable big jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “probable big jackpot”, the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “normal jackpot”, and the first The symbol “displacement” is simply referred to as “disconnection”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. , Passing through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held is provided.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117, which will be described later. For example, three symbol strings of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 9). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the lottery result of the jackpot. A decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, after the jackpot lottery is started, in the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol (one of the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot, or the first symbol indicating the loss) When the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64 before the symbol is displayed, the number of winning (entering) is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of holds is the first symbol display device. 37 and the number of the special figure holding lamps 85 that are turned on. Hereinafter, the number of suspensions for the first entrance 64 is referred to as the special figure reservation ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding number is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, the number of suspensions may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special figure hold lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variation display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is kept for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to enter the first entrance 64 easily.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the ball is held at the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, but 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the general winning slot 63 are the same. However, the number may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. A specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 203 has a reserved ball storage area 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203b, a special figure reserved ball counter 203c, a work area 203d, and a prefetch high probability state flag 203e. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 18), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing when a ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. (See FIG. 5) and a memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). In the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times. The specific configuration of the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when winning (entering) to the first entrance 64 is detected and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is stored (suspended) in the retaining ball storage area 203a. (I.e., when the number N of special figure holding balls at the time of winning a prize is less than 4), immediately, based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored (held) separately from the start of the variable production. The lottery result and the stop symbol pattern are acquired. In addition, as soon as a winning is detected, separately from the start of the fluctuating effect, acquiring a lottery result and a stop symbol pattern based on data corresponding to the winning (each value of each counter C1 to C3), Hereinafter, it is described that the lottery result and the pattern of the stop symbol are prefetched. Then, as soon as the prefetching ends, a winning information command indicating the prefetched lottery result and the stop symbol pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  When a prize information command is received by the production control device 117, a stop symbol (to be described later) is displayed based on the lottery result and the stop symbol pattern indicated by the prize information command. It is determined whether the variation effect (variation display) “” is continuously performed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “continuous chance eye effect”).

  Specific examples of “chance eyes” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B. In this embodiment, there are two types of “reach chance eyes” and “off chance eyes”. Have a chance eye. The “reach chance eyes” is a stop symbol that is displayed when an out-of-bounds reach occurs in a variable effect when a continuous chance eye effect is being performed. It is a stop symbol to stop. Further, the “off chance chance” is a stop symbol in which no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. In the following description, when both “reach chance eyes” and “out chance chances” are indicated, or only one of them is indicated, “chance eyes” is simply described.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to “chance”, and further, the stop symbol during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to change to “chance eyes” during the fluctuating performance. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Opportunities can be displayed.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance eyes” in the middle of the variation effect, when the winning information command is received, if the variation effect is being performed, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do. Further, by making the stop symbol “chance eyes”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  The reserved ball execution area 203b is a memory in which data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of jackpot or setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is stored.

  When processing such as jackpot determination or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a described above. Of each value) is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in this embodiment means that the data is moved from the area where the data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure reservation ball counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of times a first prize is held for the first entrance 64, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls. The special figure holding ball counter 203c has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  In the above-described special figure holding lamp 85 (see FIG. 2), the same number of lamps as the special figure holding ball number N are turned on. More specifically, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) changes, the special figure reservation ball after the counter value changes from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117. A pending number command indicating the value of the number N is transmitted. When the production control device 117 receives the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special figure hold lamp 85 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command. .

  The work area 203d is an area for storing data related to the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203d.

  The prefetching high probability state flag 203e has a high probability of jackpot probability when prefetching the lottery result or the stop symbol pattern based on the newly held winning data (each value of each counter C1 to C3). This flag indicates whether winning data should be analyzed as being in a state, or winning data should be analyzed as having a low probability of jackpot (normal state). Further, the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is initialized to OFF when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 17).

  When the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is on, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state, and when the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is off, the jackpot probability is low. The winning data is analyzed as a probability state. In a general pachinko machine, if a lottery is drawn and if the lottery result is “probable big jackpot”, the big hit probability is high until the next big jackpot (probable big jackpot or normal jackpot) Transition to a state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” or “off”, the jackpot probability shifts to a normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the newly-paid winning data is analyzed when it is held, and the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is sequentially updated according to the analyzed lottery result. Yes. Thus, after the new winning data is stored in the holding ball storage area 203a, the new winning data can be obtained without waiting until the start of the fluctuating effect corresponding to the new winning and acquiring the lottery result. When acquired, the lottery result can be analyzed (prefetched) based on the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, the reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, and the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3 provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the reserved ball execution area 203b.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination and display setting of the first symbol display device 37, It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated (returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value).

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is set at an interval of 4 ms that is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 18) or an interval of 2 ms that is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203a and a reserved ball execution area 203b. As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203a stores each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. It is memory.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a is composed of four reserved areas (a reserved first area to a reserved fourth area). The four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a include a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2, and 203a3 are not necessarily provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the reserved ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2, 203a3 is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the rest are newly stored. It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. The reserved ball execution area 203b is provided with a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, when a big win lottery is started, it is stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a by the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 20). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is shifted to each area 203b1 to 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21), and the lottery winning result is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result are performed. The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the big hit lottery is started, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 in the holding first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the holding ball execution area 203b. Shifted. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. The

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203b is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area of the holding ball storage area 203a is executed by a holding ball storage area forward feed process (see FIG. 20) described later. Shift processing is performed in which data stored (suspended) in (second to fourth) is packed into an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved area (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the data shift in the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is “4” and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reservation ball storage area 203a. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the data in the other areas (second to fourth) are each assigned the area number 1. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. .

  For example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is “2”, only the data in the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is thus completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data (holding number) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a is counted by the special figure holding number counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. If it occurs, data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to the value (special figure holding ball number N) indicated by the special figure holding number counter 203c. doing.

  Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the reserved area, so that data is transferred from the shift source area to the shift destination area. After shifting, the data of the shift source area can be left as it is without being cleared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of random numbers to be jackpots: low probability (normal hit probability is normal) and high probability (high hit probability is higher than normal). Low probability (big hit probability) There are two types of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state), the values are “373,727”, and the random number values that are jackpots at the time of high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) are 13 The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “0,4 And two types of hits are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 includes a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, “probable big jackpot” and “normal jackpot”, and one type corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that “big hit” and “high probability state (probability change big hit) after the big hit” based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 Is “probable jackpot”, and “normal jackpot” is determined when it is determined as “big jackpot” and “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”. In addition, a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. .

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Stop before and after detachment reach” (for example, a range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than detachment before and after detachment” (for example, a range of 9 to 38) after the reach has occurred and the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach design. Then, three stop (effect) patterns (modes of display results of dynamic display) are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) in which reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. 203a.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure pending number counter This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the value of 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, when each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a in a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is secured. Therefore, a table having a narrow random value range of 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “front / rear out of reach” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than back and forth out” is 9 to 50, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the low probability state (the state where the big hit probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, the three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter” and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  In the present embodiment, the first variation type counter CS1 causes a deviation variation (11-second effect), a normal reach variation (20-second effect), a super reach variation (40-second effect), and a special reach variation (60-second effect). ), One pattern (display mode) is determined. By determining this pattern, a rough variation time of the symbol variation is determined. Hereinafter, these four variation effect patterns are referred to as normal variation effect patterns.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 6-8, the pattern of the change effect provided in this Embodiment is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, 15 types of variation effect patterns are provided, and in addition to the above-described four factors of deviation variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, and special reach variation, chance eye normal variation (20-second effect) , Chance eyes super fluctuations A to D (production for 40 seconds each) and chance eyes special fluctuations A to F (production for 60 seconds each) are provided.

  Although the details will be described later, the chance eye normal fluctuation is executed instead of the normal reach fluctuation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D are determined in advance. When the condition is satisfied, instead of the super reach variation, the chance special variation A to F is executed instead of the special reach variation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When this chance normal variation, chance super variation A to D, and chance special variation A to F are executed, a “chance eye” is displayed at least once within the variation time, and then a stop symbol is displayed. . The predetermined conditions will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

  First, a normal variation effect pattern will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of a normal variation effect pattern and the contents of the effect. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the out-of-range fluctuation, a stop symbol is displayed 11 seconds after the start of execution of the effect (for example, high-speed fluctuation). Similarly, in the case of the normal reach variation, the stop symbol is displayed 20 seconds after the start of the production, the super reach variation is 40 seconds, and the special reach is 60 seconds. Normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, and special reach fluctuation each generate a reach and perform a flashy production (hereinafter referred to as “reach fluctuation”) to give the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state that is advantageous. It is something to have.

  Next, the chance eye normal fluctuation will be described. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance normal variation and the effect contents. The chance normal variation (20 seconds) is executed instead of the normal reach variation (20 seconds), and the “chance eye” is displayed once within the variation time. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), the chance eye normal fluctuation is composed of a deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) and a reach fluctuation (9 seconds). An out-of-range change is executed with the symbol “chance”, followed by a reach change, and a stop symbol is displayed.

  Next, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D will be described. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye super fluctuations A to D and the contents of the effects. The chance eye super fluctuations A to D (40 seconds each) are executed instead of the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). The chance eye super fluctuations A and B are configured to display the “chance eye” once within the fluctuation time. Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation C is twice and the chance eye super fluctuation D is 3 in the same manner. It is configured to display once. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the chance super variation A is composed of a deviation variation (11 seconds) and a reach variation (29 seconds). The “off chance” deviation fluctuation is executed, and the reach fluctuation is executed subsequently, and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, the chance eye super fluctuation B is composed of two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation with the “chance eye” symbol is first executed, and then again, Normal reach change is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the chance eye super fluctuation C is composed of two deviation fluctuations (each 10 seconds) and a normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds). This is executed twice in succession, followed by normal reach fluctuation and a stop symbol is displayed. The chance super variation D is composed of four deviations (each 10 seconds). When the execution is started, first, the chance symbol “chance eye” deviation variation is executed three times in a row. Then, the deviation variation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, while the normal deviation fluctuation (see FIG. 6A) is an effect of 11 seconds, in this 10-second deviation fluctuation, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the fluctuation starts is shortened by 1 second. .

  Next, the chance eye special fluctuations A to F will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye special fluctuations A to F and the effect contents. The chance eye special fluctuations A to F (each 60 seconds) are executed in place of the special reach fluctuations (60 seconds). The chance eye special fluctuations A and B are configured to display the “chance eye” once within the fluctuation time. Similarly, the chance eye special fluctuations C and D are twice, and the chance eye special fluctuation E Is displayed three times and the chance special variation F is displayed four times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the chance special variation A is composed of a deviation variation (11 seconds) and a reach variation (49 seconds). The “off chance” deviation fluctuation is executed, and the reach fluctuation is executed subsequently, and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, the chance eye special fluctuation B is composed of a normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) and a super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation whose stop symbol is “chance eye” first. Is executed, and then the super reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Moreover, the chance special variation C is composed of three normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds each). When the execution is started, the normal reach fluctuation with the stop symbol “chance eye” is executed twice in succession. Once again, the normal reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Further, the chance eye special fluctuation D is composed of two deviation fluctuations (each 10 seconds) and a super reach fluctuation (40 seconds). When the execution is started, the stop symbol is first out of the “chance eye”. The fluctuation is executed twice in succession, and then the super reach fluctuation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. The chance eye special fluctuation E is composed of two deviation fluctuations (10 seconds each) and two normal reach fluctuations (20 seconds each). When the execution is started, the stop symbol is “chance eye” first. The deviation variation is executed twice in succession, and subsequently, the normal reach variation in which the stop symbol is “chance” is executed. Finally, the normal reach variation is executed and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, the chance special variation F is composed of five deviation fluctuations (10 seconds or 16 seconds). When the execution is started, the deviation pattern of the “chance eye” is first executed (16 seconds). Subsequently, the deviation of the stop symbol “chance” is continuously executed three times (for 10 seconds). Finally, the deviation variation is executed again and the stop symbol is displayed. Note that the normal deviation fluctuation (see FIG. 6A) is an effect of 11 seconds, whereas in the deviation fluctuation of 16 seconds, for example, the time of high-speed fluctuation after the fluctuation starts is extended by 5 seconds. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, “chance eye normal fluctuation (20 seconds)” or “chance eye super fluctuation A” by combining normal fluctuation effects (out-of-range fluctuation, normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc.). ~ D (40 seconds) "and" Chance Eye Special Fluctuation (60 seconds) "," Chance Eye Normal Fluctuation "," Chance Eye Super Fluctuation AD ", and" Chance Eye Special Fluctuation " When executing a variation effect according to “A to F”, it is only necessary to combine the effect data used for the normal variation effect. Therefore, special production data (variation production data described later) is prepared only for “chance eye normal fluctuation”, “chance eye super fluctuation A to D”, and “chance eye special fluctuation A to F”. Therefore, the amount of variable effect data stored in the character ROM 275 of the effect control device 117 described later can be suppressed, and consumption of the character ROM 275 can be suppressed.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a variation effect (variation display) is executed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is scrolled vertically.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols. The details of the virtual symbol reel will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to a “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction of the variable display (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first per random number counter storage area of the reserved ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change according to the value of 203b1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 9A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is variably displayed so as to scroll (horizontal scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 9B, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from top to bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2', and Z3 'are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, in the left symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the right symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. Is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right or the top, middle, and bottom three levels. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five valid lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in both cases of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, at the time of horizontal scrolling, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. ing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of an upper line L1 ′, a middle line L2 ′, a lower line L3 ′, a right rising line L4 ′, and a left rising line L5 ′ are effective lines. Is set.

  In each game, when the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the variable display scrolling vertically or horizontally is stopped, the jackpot is set as the jackpot A video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 9A), the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scrolling (FIG. 9B). The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B, “chance eyes (missing chance eyes, reach chance eyes)” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIGS. 10A and 10B show an example of a stop symbol when the direction of variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is scrolled horizontally (in the direction of arrow X in the figure). . FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the “miss chance” displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 10B shows the “reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of "the chance eye".

  First, the “off chance chance” will be described. As described above, the “miss chance” is a stop pattern in which three identical symbols are displayed but stopped without reaching. In FIG. 10A, the “turtle” symbol is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Reach has not occurred in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a reach is not generated, and a stop symbol on which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is regarded as a “miss chance”. In the example shown in FIG. 10 (a), the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is “turtle”. A pattern (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) may be used.

  Next, the “reach chance” will be described. As described above, the “reach chance” is a stop symbol that stops after three reachable symbols are displayed after a reach has occurred. In FIG. 10B, the symbol “octopus” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, among the five effective lines L1 to L5, reach occurs in the effective line L2, but it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, in this way, reach has occurred, but it is not a hit, and a stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, “octopus”) are displayed is a “reach chance”. It is said. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 10A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, “shark” or “turtle”) as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned “displacement chance eyes” shown in FIG. 10A and “reach chance eyes” shown in FIG. 10B are examples, and the stop positions of the same symbol are not limited thereto. For example, if the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a “miss chance”. Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is “reach chance”.

  In the present embodiment, as a stop symbol pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-mentioned “disappearance chance eyes” and “reach chance eyes”, a “probability variable jackpot symbol” indicating a probability variable jackpot. Or, a “normal jackpot symbol” indicating a normal jackpot, a “rear-rear-reach reach symbol” indicating a back-and-forth off-reach, a “reach pattern other than front-back off” indicating a reach other than a back-and-forth miss, or a “completely missed symbol” indicating a complete miss Is provided.

  Here, returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′ in this embodiment) after the reach has occurred until it stops. The number of variable symbols) is determined. Then, based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the effect control device 117 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode.

  Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, but the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or the first variation type counter CS1 and It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in combination with the stop symbol.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. When selecting (variation effect pattern), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a change time (number of change symbols) from the value of the change type counter CS2 (random number value) until the last stop symbol stops is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37, and can slide the symbol which is changing in addition to the variation of a symbol. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), and conversely, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the fluctuation display time (for example, − 1 second) or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the fluctuation time.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS3. A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding number counter 203c Depending on the value (number of special figure reservation balls N) and the like, tables with different selection ratios of each effect pattern are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 18).

  Here, returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). A switch 208 and a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid 209 for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, on the condition that the touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output in the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure holding lamp 85, and turns on the lamps in the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. In addition, it controls the setting of turning off and the third symbol display effect (variation display) and jackpot effect on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. For example, the control regarding the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp in the special figure hold lamp 85 is executed based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280. An MPU 271 is connected to the input / output port 277 via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 is connected to the main control device 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the special figure holding lamp 85, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like.

  In addition, a character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control of sound output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory. The ROM 272 of the effect control device 117 includes a virtual symbol reel memory 272a and a maximum changeable period memory 272b. In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, virtual symbol reels indicating the arrangement of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the three symbol rows Z1, upper, middle, and lower (left, middle, and right). It is stored for each of Z2 and Z3 (Z1 ′, Z2 ′, Z3 ′), and the maximum changeable period memory 272b displays the stop symbol of the variable effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 as another stop. The maximum changeable period (hereinafter referred to as “maximum changeable period”) is stored in the symbol. Note that the period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol is simply referred to as a changeable period.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C, the virtual symbol reel memory 272a of the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 (left symbol row Z1 ′), and FIG. 11B shows a middle symbol row Z2 (middle symbol row Z2 ′). ) Is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to (), and FIG. 11 (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol column Z3 (right symbol column Z3 ′).

  In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  In the virtual symbol reel memory 272a, a virtual symbol reel indicating the arrangement of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored for each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Memory. As described above, the arrangement of the third symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is determined for each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. 10 types of character designs corresponding to the numbers "and a sub-pattern (shell design in this embodiment) formed smaller than the main design. Yes. One virtual symbol reel indicates the arrangement of the third symbol in one symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1 is composed of 18 third symbols. From the top to the rear, the symbols are arranged as follows: “shellfish”, “crab (9)”, “shellfish”, “angel fish (hereinafter referred to as“ A fish ”) (8)”,. Shells "and" Octopus (1) "are arranged in this order, and an array number indicating arrangement on the virtual symbol reel is given from 1 to 18 in the sequence of the symbols. In addition, after the last “octopus (1)” symbol, it returns to the first symbol and repeats in the order of “shellfish”, “crab (9)”, “shellfish”,.

  The numbers enclosed in parentheses with the name of the character symbol indicate the number corresponding to the character symbol. For example, the symbol “crab” is the symbol corresponding to the number “9”. Show. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the upper symbol row Z1, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the upper symbol row Z1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the virtual symbol reel in the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 third symbols. The arrangement of the symbols is the opposite of the arrangement of the upper symbol row Z1, and from the head toward the rear, “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. 9) "and" shellfish ". And the array element number which shows arrangement | positioning in a virtual symbol reel is attached | subjected from 1 to 18 in the arrangement | sequence order. In addition, after the last “shellfish” symbol, it returns to the top symbol and repeats in the order of “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”,. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the lower symbol row Z3, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub-symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the lower symbol row Z3.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), the virtual symbol reel in the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 third symbols, and the symbol arrangement is the same as the virtual symbol reels in the lower symbol row Z3. It is an arrangement with two symbols, “shark (4)” and “shellfish” added at the end. Then, as in the case of the virtual symbol reels in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the next symbol after the final “shellfish” is returned to the top symbol, and “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, “ Haresenbon (2) ”,... Is repeatedly repeated in this order, and the sequence numbers are also assigned from 1 to 20 in order from the beginning to the rear of the sequence. Of the third symbols constituting the virtual symbol reel of the middle symbol row Z2, three consecutive third symbols (main symbol and sub symbol) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the middle symbol row Z2.

  Next, the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the maximum changeable period memory 272b of the effect control device 117, and FIG. 12B shows an outline of the maximum changeable period of outlier fluctuation. FIG. 12C is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the maximum changeable period of the normal reach fluctuation.

  In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  The maximum changeable period memory 272b is a memory that stores a maximum changeable period of deviation fluctuation that is started in the third symbol display device 81 and a maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, 10 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of outlier fluctuation, and 15 seconds is stored as the maximum changeable period of normal reach fluctuation.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as variations of a normal variation effect, deviation variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), special reach variation (60 Seconds). However, among them, the fluctuation effects for changing the stop symbol during the fluctuation effects are only the deviation fluctuation and the normal reach fluctuation. The reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although the overall time of the variation effect differs for each variation effect pattern, the three symbol sequences (for example, the upper symbol sequence Z1, the middle symbol sequence Z2, and the lower symbol sequence Z3) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. In FIG. 9A, the time until the first upper symbol row Z1 and the second lower symbol row Z3 are stopped is common (10 seconds).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is executed, immediately after the start of execution, three symbol rows (for example, upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, lower symbol row) Each of the columns Z3 (see FIG. 9A) starts high-speed fluctuation. Thereafter, the upper symbol row Z1 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation after 8 seconds and stopped after 9 seconds, and the lower symbol row Z3 is simultaneously with the stop of the upper symbol row Z1 (that is, after 9 seconds). It changes in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation and stops after 10 seconds. Then, the middle symbol row Z2 is switched in the order of medium speed fluctuation and low speed fluctuation at the same time as the lower symbol row Z3 stops (that is, after 10 seconds) and stops after 11 seconds.

  Regardless of deviation fluctuation (11 seconds), in each fluctuation effect, the first upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation for 1 second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, and further to low speed fluctuation. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) control processing such as switching and stopping. Similarly, the second lower symbol row Z3 for 1 second from 9 seconds to 10 seconds and the third middle symbol row Z2 for 1 second from 10 seconds to 11 seconds are changed from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) control processing such as switching and further switching to low-speed fluctuation and stopping.

  Therefore, after the stop display of the upper symbol row Z1 among the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is started, that is, after the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed fluctuation to medium speed fluctuation. In addition, even after the medium speed fluctuation is switched to the low speed fluctuation, the third symbol so that the same main symbol (the main symbol contained in the upper symbol row Z1) is included in each of the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. If the symbol is replaced (changed), the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to “chance”. That is, even after the upper symbol row Z1 starts low-speed fluctuation (after 8 seconds) after the start of outlier fluctuation, if the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are changing at high speed (less than 9 seconds), the middle symbol row Z2 Further, by replacing (changing) the third symbol of the lower symbol row Z3, the stop symbol of the deviation variation can be changed to “chance”.

  Therefore, only when the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed (for example, less than 8 seconds), changing the stop symbol during the changing effect to “chance” It is possible to secure a longer period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, the same main symbol. However, the third symbol may be changed so as to fall within the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the start of the deviation fluctuation, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, and after the stop symbol display of the lower symbol row Z3 is started (after 9 seconds), that is, the lower symbol row Z3 is changed from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed. Even after switching to fluctuation, or after switching from medium speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation, if the middle symbol row Z2 is changing fast (less than 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed). The stop pattern of deviation fluctuation can be changed to “chance”.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds) is 10 seconds.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 12C, when normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is executed, three symbols of upper, middle, and lower immediately after the start of execution, as in the case of outlier fluctuation. Rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 each start high-speed fluctuation, upper symbol row Z1 stops after 9 seconds, lower symbol row Z3 stops after 10 seconds, and middle symbol row Z2 changes at medium speed and slow after 10 seconds. Switch in order of variation. However, after that, after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues for 10 seconds, the display is stopped.

  In the case of normal reach fluctuation, the same main symbol is always included in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Even if the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display is long (10 seconds), so the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced even if the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at medium speed or low speed. By (changing), it is possible to change the stop pattern of out-of-fluctuation fluctuation to “chance”.

  Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed (for example, less than 10 seconds), the changeable period can be secured longer than when changing the stop symbol during the changing effect to “chance”. It is possible to further increase the chances of performing the continuous chance eyes production.

  For example, if it is less than 5 seconds after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds), the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed. Here, the reason for setting it to less than 5 seconds is to make sure that the stop symbol is changed. Depending on the contents of the control processing (for example, when the control burden is small), the maximum changeable period is 10 seconds. It may be close to. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, opportunities for performing the continuous chance effect can be further increased. As described above, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is 15 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of the third symbol arrangement determined by the virtual symbol reel. It is comprised so that. For example, if the remaining effect time is short (1 second) after the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started like the deviation fluctuation, even if the stop symbol is changed, the scrolling display is performed up to the changed third symbol. In some cases, the desired stop symbol cannot be displayed. However, if it is normal reach fluctuation, after the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the remaining effect time is long (10 seconds). If it is less than 5 seconds after the start of the stop display, the stop symbol is changed, Up to the changed third symbol can be scroll-displayed, and a desired stop symbol can be reliably displayed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed only when the changed stop symbol (“chance eye”) can be reliably displayed, such as the normal reach variation, so regardless of the deviation variation or the normal reach variation. The control burden can be reduced as compared with the case of changing the stop symbol. In addition, you may comprise so that the change of a stop symbol may be tried irrespective of a deviation fluctuation and a normal reach fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of out-of-range fluctuation (11 seconds), the high-speed fluctuation time of the middle symbol row Z2 is short (1 second), so the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed). Although there is no change, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is lengthened (for example, 6 seconds, etc.), and the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced (changed) as in the case of the normal reach fluctuation. Also good.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period is changed according to the variation effect pattern, but all the maximum changeable periods are the same time (8 seconds) regardless of the variation effect pattern. ). In other words, if all of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the third symbol of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is replaced (changed) and removed. You may comprise so that the stop symbol of a fluctuation | variation may be changed into a "chance eye". As described above, for one second from 8 seconds to 9 seconds, the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high speed fluctuation to the medium speed fluctuation, and further, the control process such as switching to the low speed fluctuation and stopping is performed reliably (follow-up). This is a margin period provided for Therefore, depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the maximum changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured for a long time, opportunities for performing the continuous chance effect can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum changeable period corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds) is set to 15 seconds, but may be determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. That is, since the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach, the time that allows the control process to be executed reliably is subtracted from the determined time. The maximum changeable period. If comprised in this way, since the maximum changeable period can be ensured longest according to the production content, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance eye production can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds) is the same as the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (after 9 seconds). There is no need to set it as desired. For example, the timing at which stop display of the lower symbol row Z3 is started may be made faster than the timing at which the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the lower symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed is lower than the timing when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed. The timing at which the stop display of the column Z3 is started may be delayed. The same applies to the timing at which the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed (after 10 seconds) and the timing at which the stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (after 10 seconds). It can be set arbitrarily.

  Here, returning to FIG. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / O values. Working area (working area). Further, the RAM 273 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. The RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 includes a stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a, a special figure holding ball counter 273b, a chance eye consecutive number counter 273c, a variation time memory 273d, a variation time counter 273e, and a variation start flag 273f. The stop symbol changeable period flag 273g, the stop symbol setting flag 273h, the stop symbol set flag 273i, the chance eye display number selection counter 273j, the pseudo change chance eye display number memory 273k, and the stop symbol pattern table memory 273l and a display symbol pattern memory 273m.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is a memory for storing a stop symbol instruction storage table. The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a set value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the variation effect being executed and each variation effect scheduled to be executed are executed individually. is there.

  Here, the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and FIG. 14B is an example of the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110 and a set value set in accordance with the command. is there.

  The stop symbol instruction storage table is a table for storing a set value indicating a stop symbol to be set when the variation effect being executed and each variation effect scheduled to be executed are executed individually. is there. As shown in FIG. 14A, the stop symbol instruction storage table includes an execution area, a first holding area, a second holding area, a third holding area, a fourth holding area, and a next holding area. Is provided.

  In the execution area, a set value indicating a stop pattern of the variation effect being executed is stored, and the first to fourth reserved areas and the next reserved area are set when the variable effect scheduled to be executed is executed. The set value of the power stop symbol is stored. More specifically, in the first reserved area, a set value of a stop symbol to be set when a variation effect scheduled to be executed next, that is, a variation effect whose order of execution is the first is executed is stored. The

  Similarly, in the second reserved area, the execution schedule is the second variation effect, in the third reservation area, the execution schedule is the third variation effect, and in the fourth reservation area, the execution schedule is scheduled. The set values of stop symbols to be set when the fourth variation effect is executed are stored. The next reserved area is an area in which the set value is stored only when the set value is stored in each of the first to fourth reserved areas. In the next reserved area, the set value of the stop symbol to be set when the variation effect corresponding to the set value of the fourth reservation area is finished and the next variation effect is executed is stored.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, “off” is stored as a set value in the execution area. Hereinafter, in order to clarify that it is a set value, when the set value is indicated, “set value:” is described before each set value. For example, when the set value is “out”, “set value: out” is described. Then, “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area. Similarly, “setting value: chance chance & probable big hit” is stored in the third holding area, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and nothing is stored in the next holding area. Absent.

  In addition, although mentioned later for details, when the variation production corresponding to the setting value of an execution area is complete | finished and the next variation production is started, the setting value of a 1st holding | maintenance area is shifted to an execution area. Then, each set value of the second to fourth reserved areas is shifted to the area with the smaller area number (first to third reserved area), and the set value of the next reserved area is shifted to the fourth reserved area. The Thereby, the setting value which shows the stop symbol of the variation production in execution is memorize | stored in the execution area. In addition, when shifting the setting value of each holding area (the 1st-4th holding area, the next holding area), for example, it may be performed only when the setting value is stored in the holding area of the shift source. As a result, the number of data shifts can be reduced, so that the control burden can be reduced. Further, the setting value of each holding area (the first to fourth holding areas and the next holding area) may be shifted regardless of whether or not the setting value is stored in the holding area of the shift source. good.

  Next, the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect will be described. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol in the variation effect. As shown in FIG. 14B, in this embodiment, eight types of setting values are provided. Specifically, as the set value, “set value: miss”, “set value: chance chance”, “set value: skip after miss”, “set value: skip after jackpot”, “set value: first skip”, “Set value: jackpot”, “set value: chance eye & probability variable jackpot”, and “set value: chance eye & normal jackpot” are provided.

  If a variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area of the stop symbol instruction storage table is “setting value: out”, the stop symbol of the variation effect becomes “out symbol other than chance” and the execution area is set. If the variation effect is executed when the value is “set value: chance”, the stop symbol of the variation effect becomes “chance”. Similarly, when a variation effect is executed when the setting value of the execution area is “setting value: skip after losing”, “setting value: skip after jackpot”, “setting value: first skip”, When the stop symbol is “out-of-chance symbols other than chance” and the variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area is “setting value: jackpot”, the stop symbol of the variation effect is “probable bonus jackpot” Or “normal jackpot symbol”. Which jackpot stop symbol will be determined is determined when a stop symbol command described later is received by the effect control device 117.

  In addition, when a variation effect is executed when the setting value of the execution area is “setting value: chance chance & probable big hit”, the chance effect is displayed at least once in the variation effect, and finally The stop symbol is “probable big hit symbol”. In addition, when a variation effect is executed when the set value of the execution area is “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot”, the chance effect is displayed at least once in the variation effect, and finally The stop symbol is “normal jackpot symbol”.

  Next, the timing at which a new set value is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table will be described. FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main controller 110 and a set value corresponding to the lottery result indicated by the command. When the effect control device 117 receives the winning information command (lottery result) transmitted from the main control device 110, the set value corresponding to the received winning information command is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. . In that case, the set values are stored in the order of the smaller area numbers in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas).

  As shown in FIG. 14C, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “rear out of front / rear out”, “reach out of front / rear out”, or “complete out”, “setting value: out” stores the stop symbol instruction. Newly stored in the table. Further, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot”, “setting value: jackpot” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  Although details will be described later, when the set value corresponding to the received winning information command (lottery result) is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the contents of the set value stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed. Accordingly, the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table are updated (see S1509, S1510, and S1512 in FIG. 34). When this update is performed, “setting value: out” and “setting value: jackpot” stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table are changed to any of the eight types of setting values described above.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The special figure holding ball counter 273b is a counter that counts the number of times a prize is held for the first entrance 64 (the number N of special figure holding balls). The special figure holding ball counter 273b has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the initial value of the RAM is set (see S1013 in FIG. 27). Note that the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b (number of special figure holding balls N) is determined when a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 33), a variation pattern command, and an effect. It is updated when a time addition command is received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The chance-number continuous number counter 273c is a counter indicating the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance-number” is continuously executed. The chance number continuous number counter 273c is incremented by 1 each time a fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” is executed, and when the continuous chance effect is ended (see S1417 in FIG. 33). Initialized to “0” when initial value is set (see S1013 in FIG. 27).

  The variation time memory 273d is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received, the variation time is stored in the variation time memory 273d (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern (out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, special reach variation, etc.) to be executed, and the effect time addition command should be started. It is a command indicating a notice effect pattern of a variable effect. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern, and the extension time and the reduction time are determined for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, the variation time memory 273d stores the total time of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the extension time (shortening time) corresponding to the effect time addition command.

  The variation time counter 273e is a counter that stores an elapsed time after the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. The variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the fluctuation start flag 273f is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33), and the third symbol display device When the variable effect is started in 81, it is set to OFF (see S1305 in FIG. 30).

  Whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is within a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). This flag is set to ON only when an out-of-range change or a normal reach change is started (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 39). While the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to another stop symbol (that is, within the changeable period). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off, it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Specifically, the changeable period has been exceeded or the variation effect has not been executed. Such as the case.

  The stop symbol setting flag 273h is a flag that indicates whether or not the stop symbol of the variable effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is being set. When the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on, it indicates that the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started (or started) is being set, and the stop symbol setting flag 273h is In the case of OFF, it indicates that the setting of the stop symbol has been completed or that the stop symbol has not been set yet.

  The stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variable effect that has been started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 has been set. The stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON when the stop symbol setting is completed. When the stop symbol set flag 273i is off, it indicates that the stop symbol has not been set yet.

  For example, the chance eye display count selection counter 273j is incremented by 1 within a range of 1 to 4, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 4), and then returns to 1. When the chance super variation A to D is executed instead of the super reach variation during the continuous chance eye production, or when the chance special variation A to F is executed instead of the special reach variation, this chance eye The value of the display number selection counter 273j is referred to. Then, among the chance eye super fluctuations A to D or the chance eye special fluctuations A to F, the one that displays “chance eyes” as many times as the referenced value is selected and executed.

  The pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k continuously displays “chance eyes” in the change effect when the chance change normal change, the chance eye super change A to D, or the chance eye special change A to F is executed. A memory in which the number of times is stored.

  The stop symbol pattern table memory 273l is a memory for storing a stop symbol pattern table. The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing in advance a third symbol array (a symbol combination) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. Note that this table only stores information indicating the “third symbol arrangement” (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol arrangement information”), and does not store image data or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern to be displayed is It is acquired from the stop symbol pattern table. And in order to comprise the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information, the image data of the 3rd symbol contained in the stop symbol is acquired. Thereafter, according to the arrangement of the third symbol indicated by the third symbol arrangement information, the image of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the stop symbol is displayed.

  Here, the stop symbol pattern table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table, and FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol pattern table that is being updated. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is set to the left symbol row Z1 ′ and the middle symbol row Z2 is set to the middle. It is only necessary to replace the lower symbol row Z3 with the right symbol row Z3 ′ and read the symbol row Z2 ′.

  The stop symbol pattern table is a table for preparing, in advance, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern for each stop symbol pattern. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, as the pattern of the stop symbol, “displacement chance eyes”, “reach chance eyes”, “probability big hit symbol”, “normal jackpot symbol”, “front and rear outlier reach symbol”, “ Reach symbols other than front / rear detachment ”and“ complete detachment symbol ”are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the stop symbol pattern table includes a probability variation jackpot area, a normal jackpot area, a front / rear reach area, a reach area other than front / rear miss, a reach chance area, and a chance area. A completely off-area and a symbol pattern generation area are provided.

  The probability variation jackpot area is an area for storing the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “probability variation jackpot symbol”. Similarly, the normal jackpot area corresponds to the “normal jackpot symbol”, the front / rear reach area corresponds to the “front / rear reach symbol”, the reach area other than the front / rear portion corresponds to the “reach symbol other than the front / rear out” The chance eye area corresponds to “reach chance eye”, the miss chance area corresponds to “miss chance eye”, and the completely missed area stores each third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “completely missed symbol” It is an area. Although the details will be described later, the symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating the stop symbol pattern table.

  Each area is provided with a first area, a second area, and a third area. In the first area, three symbol rows (for example, displayed on the third symbol display device 81) are provided. Among the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 9A)), information indicating each symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stored. Similarly, in the second area, Information indicating each symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stored, and information indicating each symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stored in the third area.

  Specifically, in the first area, there is a virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, and at the left end of the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15A, “6” is stored in the first area of the probability variation jackpot area, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. And Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, when the array number is “6”, the upper symbol row Z1 is sequentially changed from “left” to “right”. 7) "," shellfish ", and" Ankou (6) ". Similarly, when the array number of the second area is “12”, the middle symbol row Z2 is arranged in the order of “shell”, “dugong (7)”, “shell” in order from left to right. When the array number of the third area is “11”, the lower symbol row Z3 is “Ancho (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong (7)” in order from left to right. It shows that it is a symbol row lined with.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, since “Dugong (7)” is arranged on the left rising line L5 (see FIG. 9A), it becomes a stop symbol indicating the probability variation big hit symbol. Therefore, when a stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on each array number of the probability variation jackpot area, the probability variation jackpot symbol is displayed.

  The same explanation applies to the normal jackpot area, the front / rear miss reach area, the reach area other than the front / rear miss, the reach chance area, the miss chance area, and the complete miss area.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored in the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The amount of information stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Next, the symbol pattern generation area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol pattern generation area is a work area for updating each area (probability jackpot area or normal jackpot area) in the stop symbol pattern table. In each of the first to third areas, a value like a counter is set. It will be updated.

  Specifically, 1 is added to the third area periodically (for example, every 5 ms), and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the third area is cleared to 1. , 1 is added to the second area. When the value of the second area reaches the maximum value (that is, 20), the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value (that is, 18), the first area is simply cleared to 1.

  Each time the value of the symbol pattern generation area is updated, the updated value (array number) of each of the first to third areas is changed to which area (for example, probability change) in the stopped symbol pattern table. It is determined whether it corresponds to a jackpot area or a normal jackpot area), and the updated value (array number) of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the determined area. That is, a new 3rd symbol array (combination of symbols) is generated in the symbol pattern generation area, and then the generated 3rd symbol array is an area corresponding to the 3rd symbol array (for example, probability variation big hit Area (usually a big hit area).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, “15” is stored in the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, “1” is stored in the second area, and “18” is stored in the third area. Suppose that Here, at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. In this case, since the value of the third area exceeds the maximum value (18), the third area is cleared to 1. At the same time, 1 is added to the second area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is updated to a state where the first area is “15”, the second area is “2”, and the third area is “1”.

  When the first area is “15”, it indicates that the upper symbol row Z1 is a symbol row lined with “shell”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shell” in order from left to right. Similarly, when the second area is “2”, the middle symbol row Z2 is aligned with “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”, and when the third area is “1”, It is shown that the column Z3 is a symbol row along with “octopus (1)”, “shellfish”, and “harisenbon (3)”.

  When these symbol sequences are combined, since “Harisenbon (2)” exists in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3, it becomes a stop symbol that indicates a chance to miss. Therefore, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the missed chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Then, once again at the update timing of the symbol pattern generation area, 1 is added to the third area. As a result, the symbol pattern generation area is “15” for the first area, “2” for the second area, The three areas are updated to the state “2”. Therefore, in this case, only the arrangement of the lower symbol row Z3 is updated.

  When the third area is “2”, the lower symbol row Z3 indicates a symbol row alongside “shellfish”, “harisenbon (2)”, and “shellfish”. Since “Harisenbon (2)” is arranged in L2, it becomes a stop symbol indicating a normal jackpot symbol. Therefore, the updated value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the missed chance area in the stop symbol pattern table.

  Similarly, the update of the stop symbol pattern table is repeated every time the symbol pattern generation area is updated. As a result of updating the symbol pattern generation area, if a stop symbol indicating a front / rear reach symbol or a reach symbol other than front / rear error is generated, the updated symbol pattern generation area value is displayed in the stop symbol pattern table. Is stored in the reach area other than front / rear and the reach area other than front / rear, but if the stop symbol is the reach chance, the updated symbol pattern generation area value is the reach chance area. Also remembered.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. The display symbol pattern memory 273m is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) of the stop symbols that are actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display symbol pattern memory 273m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and FIG. 16B shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of arrow X in the figure) will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′. In addition, the middle symbol row Z2 may be replaced with the middle symbol row Z2 ′, and the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  The display symbol pattern memory 273m is a memory for storing the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbols) of the stop symbols that are actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, a first area, a second area, and a third area are provided.

  That is, in the first area, the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting the upper symbol row Z1. The sequence number of the third symbol is stored. Similarly, in the second area, there is an array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2, and the array number of the third symbol stopped and displayed at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2. Remembered. In the third area, the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3, which is stopped and displayed at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3, is stored. The

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, “6” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “12” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. In this state, it is assumed that a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Since the array number of the first area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is in order from left to right. , “Dugong (7)”, “Shell”, “Ankou (6)” are displayed.

  Similarly, since the array number of the second area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the middle symbol row Z2, it is arranged in order of "shellfish", "Dugong (7)", and "shellfish" from left to right. A symbol row is displayed, and the sequence number of the third area indicates the third symbol at the left end of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, in order from the left to the right, “Ankou (6)”, “Shell”, “Dugong ( 7) "is displayed. As described above, the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. In addition, since it becomes the same description also about the case where another array number is memorize | stored in each of the 1st-3rd area, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, one array number indicating each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is stored in each of the first to third areas. Therefore, the array numbers of the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 are stored in the RAM 273 rather than storing the arrangement order of the third symbols in each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The amount of information stored in can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each of the first to third areas, the array number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the left end among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. Although stored, the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the center may be stored, or the sequence number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed at the right end may be stored. Moreover, the array numbers of any two third symbols may be stored among the three third symbols constituting each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, or each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is constituted. You may memorize | store the sequence number of three 3rd symbols, respectively.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores, for example, various data for effects used for variable effects, the character pattern of the third symbol, the background symbol, the notice character symbol, and the like. The various types of data for production correspond to data used for variation production of out-of-range variation, normal reach variation, super reach variation, and special reach variation (hereinafter referred to as “variable representation data”).

  As described above, the chance effect normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuation A to D, and the chance eye special fluctuation A to F are the fluctuation effects of the outlier fluctuation, the normal reach fluctuation, the super reach fluctuation, and the special reach fluctuation. Since they are combined, variation effect data used only for each variation effect of the chance variation normal variation, the chance interval super variation A to D, and the chance interval special variation A to F is not stored. However, it is also possible to prepare fluctuation effect data used only for each fluctuation effect of the chance eye normal fluctuation, the chance eye super fluctuations A to D, and the chance eye special fluctuations A to F and store them in the character ROM 275.

  The character ROM 275 stores the effect data as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable effect data storage area 276a and a stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  The variation effect data storage area 276a is a memory for storing variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop symbol data storage region 276b is a third symbol display device. A memory for storing image data of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop symbol data”) for constituting a stop symbol to be displayed at 81.

  In the present embodiment, one variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. As will be described in detail later, when the variation effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. A stop symbol (stop symbol data) is displayed every time (see S1310 and S1311 in FIG. 30).

  When the effect control device 117 receives the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 reads out the variation effect data of the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the received command from the character ROM 275. Then, it is stored in this variable effect data storage area 276a (see S1908 and S1909 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when a stop symbol command transmitted from main controller 110 is received, stop symbol data of a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the received command is read from character ROM 275 and stored in this stop symbol data storage area 276b. (Refer to S2114 to S2117 in FIG. 41).

  The reason why various data are read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area 276a and the stop symbol data storage area 276b is because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors and the like, a voltage of 12 volts, and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltages required by the control devices 110 to 114 are supplied to each.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24). Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203 and issues a payout initialization command for causing the payout controller 111 to clear the backup data. It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 17 to 24. The MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process (see FIG. 17) that is activated upon power-on, a main process (see FIG. 18) that is executed after the startup process, and a regular (this embodiment) In the form, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) activated at a cycle of 2 ms) and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal (see FIG. 24). First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing and main processing will be described.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switch reading processes are executed (S501). Here, for example, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read and provided in various winning ports (general winning port 63, specific winning port 65a, first winning port 64, etc.). When a winning is detected in the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the balls having the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 The updated value is stored in a second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and those counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment In the embodiment, when it reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the firing control process is performed on the condition that a touch switch (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 is detected and a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected. This is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  In this start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance switch 208a is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 ( S651). In the processing of S651, if it is determined that the first entrance switch 208a is off and there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S651: No), this is performed without performing anything. The start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, when the state of the first entrance switch 208a is on and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (number of special figure holding balls N) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), the processing of S653 to S662 Each process is skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number N of special figure reservation balls) is less than 4 in the processing of S652 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Are stored in each of the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) updated by the processing of S653 is “1”, each storage area 203a1 to 203a3 of the hold first area has each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored. That is, if the special figure holding ball number N is “X”, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding X area.

  Next, a new winning lottery result is acquired based on the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e (S655). More specifically, if the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is on, the stored value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the prefetching high probability state flag 203e is off. Then, assuming that the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 are analyzed. As a result of the lottery, whether it is a “big hit” or “off”, if it is a big hit, “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, if it is out of place, the stop symbol is “rear out of front” or “out of front” It is acquired (read ahead) whether it is “non-reach” or “completely off”.

  Next, a winning information command indicating the acquired lottery result is output to the effect control device 117 (S656). Here, the winning information command is immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 18) of the main process. Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, if a winning information command is transmitted immediately, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 at a maximum of about 4 ms earlier.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the prize control device 117 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. The control burden can be distributed. In addition, the main control device 110 can separately transmit the incoming ball information command and other commands to the effect control means 117, so that it is possible to disperse the control burden as compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. .

  In this embodiment, the winning information command is output immediately. However, here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed, and the winning information command is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process at the execution timing of the next main process. You may comprise as follows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S655 is a big hit (S657). If the lottery result is a big hit (S657: Yes), it is determined whether or not the big win is a promising big hit (S658). . On the other hand, when the lottery result is out (S657: No), the process of S658 to S660 is skipped and the process proceeds to S661.

  In the process of S658, if the big hit is a probable big hit (S658: Yes), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to ON (S659). On the other hand, if the jackpot is a normal jackpot (S658: No), the prefetch high probability state flag 203e is set to OFF (S660).

  Next, a hold number command is set (S661). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 203c (the special figure hold ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the production control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is indicated by the lighting state (S662). When the process of S662 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  According to the start winning process (S504) in FIG. 23 described above, when a winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected by the first winning slot switch 208a, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1) (Each value of .about.C3) can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored in the area with the smaller area number. Therefore, the data is given with the temporal winning order (winning order). Can be remembered.

  Further, a lottery result of data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the winning at the first entrance 64 is pre-read, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is output to the external output process (see FIG. It is possible to immediately output to the effect control device 117 without waiting for S201 of 18). By immediately outputting (transmitting) the winning information command, the command can be transmitted to the effect control device 117 earlier by about 4 ms at maximum. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Each time the lottery result of data corresponding to a new winning is prefetched (acquired), the state of the prefetching high probability state flag 203e can be updated based on the lottery result. Therefore, even if the lottery result is not acquired by waiting until the start of the fluctuating production corresponding to the new winning, when the new winning data is acquired, the lottery result is displayed in the state of the prefetch high probability state flag 203e. Analysis (prefetching) based on

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout / release control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing of the main controller 110 and the payout launch controller 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed in the payout / release control device 111 will be described. By such NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main controller 110, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance in the stack pointer is set, and a wait process (in order to wait for the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the effect control device 117, etc.) to become operable) 1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 of the main processing (see FIG. 18). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. On the other hand, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203 after transmission of the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 17) of the main controller 110 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 ms. It is processing. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to a sub-control device (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 22), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 23) described above or the change of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the change start process (see FIG. 21) described later. Various commands such as a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, and an effect time addition command are transmitted to the effect control device 117 (necessary for display). Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. Then, when the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), A variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and a stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS 1 to CS 3 provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, a display control process for the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) in the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display unit 83 In FIG. 2, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the winning determination in the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time, and the ball Becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and changes. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 24 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to the sub-control devices (payout control device 111, effect control device 117, etc.) (S212). . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the initial value of the startup process (see FIG. 17) can be saved without saving the stack pointer value. In the process (S101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the fluctuation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation process (S204) of the main controller 110. The variation process (S204) is a process for starting the variation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (suspended) in the reserved ball storage area 203a. 18).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As for the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st symbol display device 37 in the case of the jackpot (that is, “probability jackpot”, “normal jackpot” two), and jackpot Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this fluctuation process (S204) is terminated without performing anything, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No) as a result of checking by the process of S304, S305 to S305. The process of S306 is skipped, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reservation ball storage area forward process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reservation ball storage area 203a to the reservation ball execution area 203b is performed. This is executed (S305), and a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  The reserved ball storage area progressive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, since this fluctuation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms. However, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), or if it is fluctuating (S302: Yes). Since the processes of S305 to S306 are skipped, the variable display is not started each time the variable process is executed, and the data corresponding to the pending winning is not consumed.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), this variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, the “high probability state ( Whether the symbol becomes “probable jackpot” or the symbol that becomes “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red from the start of variation until the variation time elapses, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S309). When receiving the stop command, the effect control device 117 ends the variable display being executed on the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, in the 3rd symbol display device 81, when the variation time elapses, the variation is stopped, and when the stop command is received, one variation effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81 ends. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) of main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is a process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 19). Process. This process is a process that is executed when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more.

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b (S351). In the process of S351, specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first per category counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first per category counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is converted into the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to.

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to the area (first to third area) having the smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 203c after the subtraction (special figure reservation ball number N) is shown. A hold number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the production control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is displayed in the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 19).

  Next, the variation start process (S306) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) of main controller 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the game is a big hit or miss based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result. It is a process for starting the change display, and is a process executed in the change process (see FIG. 19).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the first per-type counter storage area 203b2. And the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  And it is discriminate | determined based on the value of the 1st hit random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401 (S402). Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) at that time. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), “373,727” is the winning value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at the time of high probability (jackpot probability) Is a higher value than usual), “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733” is the winning value.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is, which jackpot of the two types of jackpot (“probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S401 Whether there is a hit type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 (“0 to 4”) is “0, 4” in the case of jackpot, “low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot ends” becomes “1 , 2, 3 ”,“ high probability state (probability jackpot) after jackpot ”is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S402 that the game is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode for the big win is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the process shifts to “a high probability state (probability big hit) after the jackpot end” or “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end”. Set When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off.

  Further, based on the transition state after the end of jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by the effect control device 117. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit is ended by the process of S403.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S404). That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough symbol variation variation time is determined from normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds), and special reach variation (60 seconds). At the same time, after the reach has occurred based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops ( In other words, the number of variable symbols) is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  The relationship between the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the variation time is preset by a table or the like. The variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that it is not a big hit (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b is set. Based on the value of C3, an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be “rear out of front / rear”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, or “complete out”. In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), whether the special figure pending number counter 203c The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs according to the value (number of special figure holding balls N) and the like.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S406). That is, as in S404 described above, based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, the deviation fluctuation (11 seconds), the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), the super reach fluctuation (40 seconds), the special reach fluctuation (60 seconds). In addition, the fluctuation time of the rough symbol variation is determined from among the symbols, and the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) after the reach has occurred based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the symbol (medium symbol)) stops is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S405, if “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, special reach) is always performed by the process of S406. A table is set in advance so that any one of (variation) is determined.

  When the process of S404 or the process of S406 ends, next, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, The variation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the addition / subtraction of the production time is performed according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is increased. 4 types of addition values are determined, i.e., when 2 seconds is added, and when the variable display time is subtracted 1 second.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the process of S410, a change direction command is set according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b (S411), the change start process (S306) is terminated, and the change process (FIG. 19) Return to Reference).

  The variable direction command set by the processing of S411 is a command that defines whether the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scroll or horizontal scroll. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, a change direction command corresponding to horizontal scrolling is set, and the first per-random number counter storage area is set. When the value of 203b1 is an odd number, a change direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the variation start process (S306) is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 18). When the production control device 117 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for the 3rd symbol display by the 3rd symbol display device 81), A variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and a stop symbol displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 are set.

  Here, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 18), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. In addition, before executing the change start process (S306), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the “holding number command” is set by the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), and then the “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” by the variation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the production control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command”, and “variation direction command”. Is done.

  Note that the “variation direction command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “variation direction command”. Further, the “variation pattern command” may include the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  In addition, these commands may be transmitted in a different order. Further, the order of command transmission may be changed to change the order of transmission. For example, if the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the production control device 117, the variation display is started before another command is transmitted, and the variation display is quickly performed. Can start. This is because the “pending number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  Further, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, 3) by executing the external output process (S201) once. For example, if the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, 6), the command is transmitted over two main processes (main process executed this time and main process executed next time). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at a time, it takes time to transmit and the main process may not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, the command may be transmitted from a command with a high priority. Specifically, as described above, the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117, and thereafter, the “hold number command” and the “stop symbol command”. , “Calculation time addition command” and the like are transmitted over one or more main processes. Note that the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside by executing one external output process (S201) may be changed depending on the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, and the like. good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. The processing of the MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  Thereafter, a data backup process for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As described later in the processing of S917 of the main processing (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), in order to start paying out a winning ball or a loaned ball, permission to pay out a ball is set (S808). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 26) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the ball payout control, which is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 25) of the payout control device 111 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). This command determination processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to each command according to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and received here. For example, the command determination processing is transmitted from the main control device 110. When a payout return command, a payout initialization command, or a prize ball command is received, the payout of prize balls or lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet started up. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and when there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are saved to the stack area, or the initial setting process of the payout control device 111 without saving the value of the stack pointer (S801). In (see FIG. 25), the processing can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 to 41, the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 42 and 43, and the tables of FIGS. 44 to 48, each control executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. Processing will be described. The process of the MPU 271 is roughly divided into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and each time a command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. Command reception interrupt processing, and stop symbol pattern table update processing that continues updating the symbol pattern table until the power is turned off and then shut off.

  For convenience of explanation, first, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, an example of the conditions for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” displayed when the effect is started will be described. To do. Next, referring to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, conditions for increasing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed in the continuous chance effect production, and the final number of continuous display of “chance eyes” when increased An example will be described.

  Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern table update process will be described with reference to FIG. 31, followed by a command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33), a startup process (see FIG. 27), and a main process (see FIG. 28). Each process will be described in order. Each flowchart is a flowchart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′, and the middle symbol is displayed. The row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the lower symbol row Z3 by the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in the main controller 110, if the number N of special figure reservation balls at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of times of holding), A lottery result corresponding to each value of the counters C1 to C3 is prefetched, and a winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted to the effect control device 117.

  Then, when the winning information command is received in the production control device 117, the production control device 117 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect, and if it is determined to start the continuous chance eye effect, it is executed. In order to set the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed or to be executed as the “chance”, the stop symbol instruction storage table in the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is updated (update of setting values of each area, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to perform the consecutive chance effect is performed only when the result of the new winning lottery is “probable big hit”, “ordinary big hit”, or “back and forth outreach”. In addition, the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” scheduled at the start of the continuous chance effect production is the timing at which the production control device 117 receives the winning information command, the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command, and the stop symbol instruction. It depends on the combination with the contents of the storage table.

  Although details will be described later (see FIGS. 47 and 48), the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect is not fixed at the start of the continuous chance effect and may increase. More specifically, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, when the last fluctuation production becomes “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” During the last variation effect, “chance eyes” of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j are displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is 2 or more, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye effect increases.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46, an example of a condition for starting a continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” displayed when the effect is started will be described. Each table in FIG. 44 to FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see FIG. 14). The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the table immediately after the setting values corresponding to the received winning information command are stored, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) The contents of the updated table are shown.

  First, FIG. 44 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received within a period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table. FIG. 44B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 44 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” when “setting value: out of” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: big hit (probability change)” is newly stored in one reserved area. Thereafter, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row on the right. This is because the winning information command is received within the changeable period. Further, “setting value: chance chance & probability variation jackpot” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect being executed and the next (first scheduled execution) variation effect, so “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession in the continuous chance effect. Is done. That is, since the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect being executed, the “chance eye” is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect scheduled to be executed.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (probability change)” is newly added to the second holding area. When the table is updated, as shown in the second row in the right figure, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed three times in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 44B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “probable big hit” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 44 (b) receives a winning information command with a lottery result of “probability big hit” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: big hit (probability change)” is newly stored in one reserved area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed. This is because a winning information command was received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed, so the stop symbol of the running variation effect cannot be changed to “chance eye”, and the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) Even if only the stop symbol is changed to “chance eyes”, “chance eyes” cannot be displayed continuously, so that it is not possible to produce continuous chance eyes.

  In addition, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (probability change)” is newly added to the second holding area. And the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row in the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first reservation area, and the second reservation area. “Set value: chance chance & probability variation jackpot” is stored, and “set value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 45 (a) shows an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” is received within a period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table. FIG. 45B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 45 (a) receives a winning information command whose lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in one reserved area. Thereafter, when the table is updated, “set value: chance” is stored in the execution area as shown in the first row on the right. This is because the winning information command is received within the changeable period. In addition, “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” is stored in the first holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the second holding area.

  As a result, as in the case of the first stage in FIG. 44A, “chance eyes” are displayed in the variation effect being executed and the next (first scheduled to be executed) variation effect. In the chance eye production, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession. That is, since the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect being executed, the “chance eye” is displayed once more than the stop symbol becomes “chance” from the variation effect scheduled to be executed. Hereinafter, the second stage and the third stage are described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row on the left, when “setting value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third holding area, “setting value: jackpot (normal) ) ”Is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the fourth row in the right figure, and“ setting ”is set in each area from the first reserved area to the third reserved area. “Value: Chance” is stored. Further, “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” is stored in the fourth holding area, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the next holding area.

  As a result, the “off chance symbol other than the chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and the “chance eyes” are displayed in each change effect from the next execution (scheduled to be executed first) to the fourth execution scheduled. Is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed four times in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, the fact that the stop pattern of the variable effect being executed does not become “chance eyes” means that the continuous chance eye effect is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the chance eye production is limited to a maximum of four times.

  FIG. 45B is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” is received during a period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed.

  The first row in the left diagram of FIG. 45 (b) receives a winning information command having a lottery result of “ordinary jackpot” when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly stored in one reserved area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed.

  This is due to the same reason as in the first stage of FIG. 44B, and since the winning information command was received during the period in which the stop symbol cannot be changed, This is because it is not possible to change to “eyes”, and as a result, it is not possible to produce continuous chance eyes.

  In addition, as shown in the second row in the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: jackpot (normal)” is newly added to the second holding area. And the table is updated, the execution area is not changed as shown in the second row in the right figure, and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first reservation area, and the second reservation area. Stores “setting value: chance & normal jackpot”, and “setting value: skip after jackpot” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command having a lottery result of “out-of-front / reach reach” is received regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period.

  The first row on the left side of FIG. 46 receives a winning information command with a lottery result of “front / rear out of reach” when “setting value: out of” is stored in the execution area. This indicates that “setting value: out (out of front and back)” is newly stored in the area. However, even if the table is subsequently updated, the execution area and the first reserved area are not changed as shown in the first row on the right, and in this case, the continuous chance effect is not performed.

  This is because, when a winning information command having a lottery result of “out-of-front / reach reach” is received, regardless of whether or not it is a changeable period, the stop pattern of the running variation effect is not changed, As a result, it is not possible to produce a continuous chance eye effect.

  Further, as shown in the second row of the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in the execution area and the first holding area, “setting value: out (back and forth out)” is displayed in the second holding area. When the table is newly updated and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed and “setting value: chance” is stored in the first holding area and the second holding area as shown in the second row of the right figure. Then, “set value: skip after losing” is stored in the third reserved area.

  As a result, “excluded symbols other than chance” is displayed in the variation effect being executed, and “chance” is displayed in the next variation effect (scheduled to be executed first) and the second change effect scheduled to be executed. Eye "is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are continuously displayed twice in the continuous chance effect production. Hereinafter, the third stage is the same, and the description is omitted.

  In addition, as shown in the fourth row in the left figure, when “setting value: out” is stored in each area from the execution area to the third holding area, “setting value: out (before and after) ”)” Is newly stored and the table is updated, the execution area is not changed and “setting value: first skip” is stored in the first reserved area as shown in the fourth row in the right figure. “Set value: chance” is stored in each area from the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area, and “set value: skip after losing” is stored in the next reserved area.

  As a result, during the execution and the next (first scheduled to be executed) variation effect, “an off-chance pattern” is displayed, and in each variation effect from the second scheduled execution to the fourth scheduled execution. Each “opportunity” is displayed. Therefore, “chance eyes” are displayed three times continuously in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, the first chance to stop the variation effect that is scheduled to be executed is not “chance”, when the continuous chance effect is executed and the final lottery result is “out-of-front / reach reach”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of three times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is set to “probable big hit (no limit)” and “normal big hit (up to four consecutive times). ) ”And“ out-of-front / reach reach (up to 3 consecutive times) ”. As a result, when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, the player is relieved according to the number of times the “chance eye” is continuously displayed, so that it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, conditions for increasing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” displayed in the continuous chance effect production, and the final number of continuous display of “chance eyes” when increased An example will be described.

  Each table in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 is a table showing an example of the contents of the stop symbols of each variation effect executed during the continuous chance effect. The left side of the figure (referred to as the left figure) shows the contents of the stop symbols for each variation effect scheduled at the start of the consecutive chance effect, and the right side of the figure (referred to as the right figure) The content of the stop symbol of each variation effect after is changed is shown.

  As described above, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, when the last fluctuation production becomes “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation”, the last During the fluctuating effect, “chance eyes” of the same number of times as the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j are displayed. Therefore, in this case, if the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is 2 or more, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye effect increases.

  First, FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 (a) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, the display is scheduled. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of this stop symbol is changed. FIG. 47B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a stop symbol is changed.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 47 (a) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance”. In FIGS. 47 and 48, the fact that “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance” in one variation effect is described as “chance eye + probability big hit”. The “normal jackpot symbol” is also described in the same manner.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, any of “chance eye super variation A to D” (see FIG. 7) is used instead of the “super reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. It should be noted that the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display count selection counter 273j. For example, if the value when the chance eye display count selection counter 273j is referred to is “2”, the “chance eye” display count in the last variation effect is two.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “probable big hit symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed up to three times, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed continuously for a maximum of five times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 47B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern is “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, and as a result, An example of the content of change when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 47 (b) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “super reach variation”, any of “chance eye super variation A to D” (see FIG. 7) is used instead of the “super reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and thereafter “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern becomes “super reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right diagram.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed at most twice, and then “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum. In this case, the “chance” is not displayed at most three times in the last variation production, when the continuous chance production is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”, This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 48 will be described. FIG. 48 (a) shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit”, the pattern of the last variation production is “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, display is scheduled. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of this stop symbol is changed. FIG. 48B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern becomes “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, It is a table | surface which shows an example of the change content when the content of a stop symbol is changed.

  The first row on the left side of FIG. 48 (a) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be two at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, any of “chance special variation A to F” (see FIG. 8) is used instead of the “special reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to four times in the last variation effect, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display count selection counter 273j. For example, if the value when the chance eye display number selection counter 273j is referred to is “3”, the display number of “chance eye” is three.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to four times. Is displayed. In other words, the “chance eyes” that were scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed continuously for a maximum of five times.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “probability big hit symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern becomes “special reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation production, “chance” is displayed up to four times, and then “probability big hit symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed for a maximum of six consecutive times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 48B shows that when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect production is “normal jackpot”, the last variation production pattern becomes “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, and as a result, An example of the content of change when the content of the stop symbol is changed is shown.

  The first row on the left in FIG. 48 (b) shows that the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” is scheduled to be 2 at the start of the continuous chance effect production. In the first variation effect, “chance” is displayed, and in the second variation effect, “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “chance”.

  Here, when the last (second) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, any of “chance special variation A to F” (see FIG. 8) is used instead of the “special reach variation”. Executed. Then, as shown in the first row on the right, “chance” is displayed up to three times in the last variation effect, and thereafter “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. As described above, the number of “chance eyes” displayed in the last variation effect is determined by the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j.

  In this case, the “chance eyes” are not displayed up to four times in the last variation effect. When the continuous chance effect is executed and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”, This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times.

  Therefore, in the first variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed, and in the second variation production, “chance eyes” are displayed up to three times. Is displayed. That is, the “chance eyes” that are scheduled to be continuous twice at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  Also, as shown in the second row of the left figure, after the start of the continuous chance effect, “chance” is displayed in the first and second variation effects, and “chance” is displayed in the third variation effect. When “ordinary jackpot symbol” is displayed after “eye” and the last (third) variation effect pattern is “special reach variation”, the result is as shown in the second row of the right figure.

  That is, in the last variation effect, “chance” is displayed at most twice, and then “normal jackpot symbol” is displayed. Therefore, the “chance eyes” scheduled to be continuous three times at the start of the continuous chance effect production are displayed four times at maximum.

  In this case, the “chance” is not displayed up to four times in the last variation effect, but as described above, the continuous chance effect is executed, and the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. This is because the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is limited to a maximum of four times. Hereinafter, the third stage and the fourth stage are also described in the same manner, and the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the final lottery result of the consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, the last fluctuation production is “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach”. When “change” occurs, the number of continuous display of “chance” is increased. As a result, when the continuous chance eye effect is executed, the player is relieved according to the number of times the “chance eye” is continuously displayed, so that it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player. Note that the variation effect that increases the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” is not limited to the last variation effect, and any variation effect of any timing may be used as long as it is a variation effect in the continuous chance effect. Further, the variation effect for increasing the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” is not limited to one variation effect, and a plurality of variation effects may be performed.

  Next, each flowchart will be described. First, stop symbol pattern table update processing (see FIG. 31) will be described, followed by command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), startup processing (see FIG. 27), and main processing (see FIG. 28) in this order. To do. Each flowchart is a flowchart when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′, and the middle symbol is displayed. The row Z2 may be read by replacing the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the lower symbol row Z3 by the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  First, stop symbol pattern table update processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol pattern table update process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol pattern table update process is a process for constantly updating the stop symbol pattern table stored in the stop symbol pattern table memory 273l from when the power is turned on until it is shut off (for example, every 5 ms). is there. In the stop symbol pattern table update process, a symbol pattern generation area update process is first executed (S2201).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32, the symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the symbol pattern generation area update process of the effect control device 117. The symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is a process for updating the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table, and is a process executed in the stop symbol pattern table update process (see FIG. 31). .

  In this symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201), first, 1 is added to the third area of the symbol pattern generation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2231). Next, it is determined whether the value of the third area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2232). If the value of the third area exceeds 18 (S2232: Yes), the value of the third area is the maximum value. This is a case where the virtual symbol reel array number (1 to 18) corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is exceeded. Therefore, the third area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the second area (S2233). On the other hand, in S2232, if the value of the third area is 18 or less (S2232: No), each process of S2233 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the second area exceeds 20 (maximum value) (S2234). If the value of the second area exceeds 20 (S2234: Yes), the value of the second area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 20) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2) is exceeded. Therefore, the second area is cleared to 1 and 1 is added to the first area (S2235). On the other hand, in S2234, when the value of the second area is 20 or less (S2234: No), each processing of S2235 to S2237 is skipped, and this symbol pattern generation area update processing is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table. The process returns to the update process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the first area exceeds 18 (maximum value) (S2236). If the value of the first area exceeds 18 (S2236: Yes), the value of the first area is the maximum value. This is a case where (the array number (1 to 18) of the virtual symbol reel corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1) is exceeded. Therefore, the first area is cleared to 1 (S2237). On the other hand, in S2236, when the value of the first area is 18 or less (S2236: No), each process of S2237 is skipped, the symbol pattern generation area update process is terminated, and the stopped symbol pattern table update process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the third area is incremented by 1, and when the value of the third area reaches the maximum value, 1 is added to the second area, and the value of the second area is the maximum value. 1 is added to the first area, the area whose value is increased by 1 may be the second area or the first area. For example, if the value of the second area is increased by one, when the value of the second area reaches the maximum value, the second area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the first area. When the value of the first area reaches the maximum value, the first area is cleared to 1, and 1 is added to the third area. When the third area reaches the maximum value, the third area is simply cleared to 1. Further, the value to be added is not limited to 1 and may be set arbitrarily. Further, a predetermined value may be added to each of the first to third areas.

  Also, a random number value (in the range of 1 to 18) corresponding to the first area may be acquired and set as the value of the first area, or a random number value (in the range of 1 to 20) corresponding to the second area may be obtained. It is good also as a value of a 2nd area, and it is good also as a value of a 3rd area by acquiring the random value (with the range of 1-18) corresponding to a 3rd area.

  Here, it returns to description of FIG. When the symbol pattern generation area update process (S2201) is completed, it is next determined whether or not the updated symbol pattern generation area value indicates a stop symbol of reach chance (S2202). Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 corresponding to the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area, the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the value of the second area, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the value of the third area. It is determined whether or not the stop symbol combined with the symbol indicates the stop symbol of the reach chance.

  In the process of S2202, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a reach chance stop symbol (S2202: Yes), the symbol pattern generation area value is stored in the reach chance eye area in the stop symbol pattern table. (S2203). Specifically, the value of the first area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the first area of the reach chance eye area, and the value of the second area of the symbol pattern generation area is similarly set to the value of the reach chance eye area. In the second area, the value of the third area of the symbol pattern generation area is stored (copied) in the third area of the reach chance area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2204.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2202, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach chance (S2202: No), the process of S2203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2204.

  In S2204, it is determined whether the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204). If the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204: Yes), Is stored in the front / rear reach area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2205). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2205 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2204, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the front / rear out of reach symbol (S2204: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / rear off Is determined (S2206). When the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the reach symbol other than front / back deviation (S2206: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the reach area other than front / back deviation in the stop symbol pattern table ( S2207). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2207 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2206, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the reach symbol other than the back and forth deviation (S2206: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates the stop symbol of the probability variation big hit symbol. It is determined whether or not to show (S2208), and if the stop symbol of the probability variation jackpot symbol is indicated (S2208: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the probability variation jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2209). Thereafter, the process returns to S2201, and the above-described processes of S2201 to S2209 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the probability variation jackpot symbol (S2208: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol? (S2210), if the stop symbol of the normal jackpot symbol is indicated (S2210: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the normal jackpot area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2211). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2211 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2210, if the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the normal jackpot symbol (S2210: No), does the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicate a stop symbol with a chance to miss? Is determined (S2212), and when a stop symbol with a chance of losing is indicated (S2212: Yes), the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the area of the chance of losing in the stop symbol pattern table (S2213). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2213 mentioned above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol other than the chance of losing (S2212: No), the value of the symbol pattern generation area indicates a stop symbol of a completely disconnected symbol. is there. Therefore, the value of the symbol pattern generation area is stored in the complete deviation area in the stop symbol pattern table (S2214). Then, it returns to the process of S2201 and repeats each process of S2201-S2214 mentioned above.

  According to the stop symbol pattern table update process of FIG. 31 described above, the stop symbol pattern table can be constantly updated (for example, every 5 ms) from when the power is turned on until it is shut off. Since the value of each area in the stop symbol pattern table can always be updated, an irregular value is acquired every time the value of each area (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) is acquired. Therefore, since the arrangement of the 3rd symbol (stop symbol) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be various, it is possible to avoid the player from having a monotonous impression on the game, and to have high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has.

  In the stop symbol pattern table, various areas such as a probable jackpot area and a normal jackpot area are provided, but once the value of the symbol pattern generation area provided as a work area (third symbol arrangement information) ) And then the value is stored (copied) in the area corresponding to the updated value (probable jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.), so it is stored accurately in the desired area regardless of timing. The third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) can be acquired.

  For example, without providing a symbol pattern generation area, the value (third symbol arrangement information) of each area (probable big hit area or normal jackpot area) in the stop symbol pattern table is directly updated. In some cases, the desired third symbol arrangement information cannot be acquired. That is, if the value in the directly updated area is not a value corresponding to the area, the value in the area needs to be corrected to a correct value (updated again or moved to an appropriate area). However, if the value in the area is acquired before the processing is completed, the wrong third symbol arrangement information is acquired. In the present embodiment, the value of the symbol pattern generation area (third symbol arrangement information) is once updated, and then the value is stored in an area (probability variation jackpot area, normal jackpot area, etc.) according to the updated value ( Therefore, the third symbol arrangement information stored in the desired area can be obtained accurately regardless of the timing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the effect control device 117. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a process executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. is there.

  In the command reception interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning information command is received (S1401). If a winning information command is received (S1401: Yes), whether or not the stop symbol setting flag 273h of the RAM 273 is on. Is determined (S1402). As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating a lottery result for a new winning.

  In the process of S1402, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on (S1402: Yes), since a stop symbol setting process (see FIG. 41) described later is being executed, it waits until the flag is turned off. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is OFF (S1402: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set ON (S1403), and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process is executed (S1404).

  The stop symbol instruction storage table update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, but is a process for storing a set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stop symbol instruction storage table. When the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is completed, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1406.

  On the other hand, if the winning information command is not received in the process of S1401 (S1401: No), the processes of S1402 to S1405 described above are skipped and the process proceeds to S1406. In the process of S1406, it is determined whether the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1406). If the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are received (S1406: Yes), the variation effect setting process is executed. (S1407).

  As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation time of variation effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), and the effect time addition command is an extension time or shortening time of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command. The variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, but is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation effect setting process (S1407) is completed, the process proceeds to S1408.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), the process of S1407 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S1408. In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not a stop symbol command has been received (S1408). If a stop symbol command is received (S1408: Yes), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on as in S1402. Is determined (S1409). As described above, the stop symbol command is a command indicating a stop symbol pattern to be displayed in the variation effect to be executed.

  If the stop symbol setting flag 273h is on in the processing of S1409 (S1409: Yes), the above stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34) is being executed. To do. On the other hand, when the stop symbol setting flag 273h is off (S1409: No), the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to on (S1410), and the stop symbol setting process is executed (S1411).

  Note that the stop symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to be started. When the stop symbol setting process (S1411) is completed, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to OFF (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if the stop symbol command is not received in the processing of S1408 (S1408: No), the processing of S1409 to S1412 described above is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1413.

  In the process of S1413, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1413). If a stop command has been received (S1413: Yes), the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is terminated (S1414). Next, the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1415), and the setting value is “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: after deviation” It is determined whether it is “Skip” (S1416).

  Here, if the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit” or “set value: skip after miss” (S1416: Yes), the chance continuous number counter 273c of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0). (S1417) and the process proceeds to S1418. On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after losing” in the processing of S1416 (S1416: No), the processing of S1417 is skipped and the processing of S1418 is performed. Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when the stop symbol command is not received (S1413: No), each process of S1414-S1417 mentioned above is skipped, and it transfers to the process of S1418. In the processing of S1418, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1418). If another command has been received (S1418: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1419).

  For example, when a power-off command is received, the power-off occurrence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 273. Also, for example, if a hold number command is received, when the hold number display update process (see S1203 in FIG. 29) is executed, the same number of lamps as the number N of special figure hold balls indicated by the received hold number command Is a process of setting the special figure hold lamp 85 to be lit.

  On the other hand, if no other command is received in the processing of S1418 (S1418: No), the processing of S1419 described above is skipped, and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated.

  According to the command reception interrupt process of FIG. 33 described above, when a winning information command is received or when a stop symbol command is received, each stop symbol setting flag 273h is turned on until it is turned off. It is possible to wait for execution of processing according to the command. Further, when a winning information command is received or when a stop symbol command is received, the stop symbol setting flag 273h can be set to ON from the start to the end of the process related to the stop symbol.

  When the process according to the winning information command is executed, a new set value is mainly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the contents of the table are updated. Further, when the process according to the stop symbol command is executed, the stop symbol of the variation effect is set mainly based on the set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table.

  For example, if a winning information command and a stop symbol command are received at the same timing, processing corresponding to each command is executed at the same timing, so one process refers to the contents of the stop symbol instruction table. During the process, the other process affects each other, for example, rewriting the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table, and as a result, there is a possibility that each process cannot be executed accurately.

  However, in this embodiment, even if the winning information command and the stop symbol command are received at the same timing, the stop symbol setting flag 273h is set to ON during the execution of one process. The other process is made to wait for execution. Therefore, the process can be executed accurately without affecting each other.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the stop symbol instruction | indication storage table update process (S1404) performed by MPU271 in the presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404) is a process for storing a set value corresponding to the received winning information command in the stopping symbol instruction storage table, and is executed every time a winning information command is received. It is. This process is executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (S1404), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b of the RAM 273 (S1501). Next, a lottery result is extracted from the received winning information command (S1502). Here, as a lottery result, whether it is `` big hit '' or `` missing '', if it is a big hit, it is `` probable big hit '' or `` ordinary big hit '', if it is out of place, the stop symbol is `` rear out of front / rear '', `` It is extracted whether it is “reach other than front / rear out” or “complete out”.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the extracted lottery result is “out” (S1503). If the extracted lottery result is “out” (S1503: Yes), the stop symbol instruction storage in the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is stored. In the table, the setting value of the area for storing the setting value of the current winning is acquired (S1504). Next, it is determined whether the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit” or “set value: skip after miss” (S1505), and the acquired set value is “set value: skip after hit”. Or, if “setting value: skip after losing” (S1505: Yes), since the setting value has already been set, the process proceeds to S1507 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: skip after hit” or “setting value: skip after losing” (S1505: No), the setting value has not been set yet, so the process proceeds to S1506. Transition. In the process of S1503, when the extracted lottery result is “winning” (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506.

  In the processing of S1506, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is set to the area corresponding to the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b among the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. (S1506). For example, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is “1”, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the first holding area. That is, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 273b is “X”, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is stored in the Xth holding area.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 14C, the set value corresponding to the extracted lottery result is “if the lottery result is“ rear out of front / rear ”,“ reach other than front / rear out ”, If the set value is “out” and the lottery result is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, then “set value: big hit”.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the extracted lottery result is a “hit” (S1507). If the extracted lottery result is “hit” (S1507: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a “probable big hit” (S1508). If the lottery result is “probable big hit” (S1508: Yes), the probable big win winning process is executed (S1509), the stop symbol instruction storage table update process is terminated, and the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Return to). Note that the probability variation jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “probability variation jackpot” is based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. It is a process for determining.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” in the processing of S1508 (S1508: No), the regular jackpot winning process is executed (S1510), the stop symbol instruction storage table updating process is terminated, and the command is received. Return to the interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Note that the normal jackpot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37, but whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “normal jackpot” is based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. It is a process for determining.

  In the processing of S1507, if the lottery result is “displacement” (S1507: No), it is determined whether it is “rearward / rearward reach” (S1511). When the lottery result is “front / rear out of reach” (S1511: Yes), the front / rear out of reach reach winning process is executed (S1512), the stop symbol instruction storing table update process is terminated, and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 33). The back-and-forth losing reach winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38, but the stop symbol instruction storage table indicates whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “out (chance eye)”. It is a process for determining based on the content of.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not “rear out of front / rear reach” in the process of S1511 (S1511: No), this stop symbol instruction storage table update process is terminated without doing anything, and the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Return to).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the probability variation big win process (S1509) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the probability variation big win process (S1509) of the effect control device 117. The probability variation jackpot winning process (S1509) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “probability variation jackpot” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the stopped symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In this probability variation big prize winning process (S1509), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 44) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1601). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of “setting value: out” following the preceding area is counted from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored. The continuous number is set (S1602).

  Here, the “front area” indicates an area in a direction approaching the execution area. Specifically, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues to the front (see FIG. 44).

  Next, in the counted “setting value: out”, it is determined whether the setting value in the execution area is the foremost “setting value: out” (S1603), and the counted “setting value: out” If the set value of the execution area is the foremost “set value: off” (S1603: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the variation effect being executed. Therefore, in this case, first, it is determined whether “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1604). On the other hand, when the set value of the execution area is not the foremost “set value: out” among the counted “set value: out” (S1603: No), the stop pattern of the variation effect scheduled to be executed (not executed). Therefore, the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the process of S1604, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1604: Yes), the fluctuation effect being executed (that is, the reach effect) is being executed rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect. Prioritize continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1609. This is because the “super-reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” reach production generally has a higher game value production than the continuous chance eye production.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1604, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is not executed (S1604: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed. Then, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1605: No), since the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed, the process proceeds to S1609.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1605, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1605: Yes), it is a case of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed. In this case, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1606). The stop symbol replacement process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being performed to “chance”. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′) that is changing at high speed is replaced, Stop symbol is changed to “Chance”.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) ends, next, 1 is added to the chance continuous number counter 273c (S1607). In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, all the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored to the execution area are changed to “setting value: chance” (S1608), The process proceeds to S1612.

  In the processing of S1609, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. The number of “off” is counted to determine the number of consecutive out (S1609). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1610).

  If the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1610: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained by using the variation effect of the previous winning (scheduled) and the variation effect of the current winning (scheduled). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the “setting value” that follows the preceding area from the area in which the previous winning setting value is stored is stored. : “Off” are all changed to “set value: chance” (S1611), and the process proceeds to S1612.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1610, when the number of consecutive continuations is less than 1 (S1610: No), this is a case where the continuous chance effect presentation cannot be started, so this probability variation big win winning process is terminated and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (FIG. 34).

  In the processing of S1612, “setting value: jackpot” of the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is changed to “setting value: chance chance & probability change jackpot” (S1612). ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize should be stored (S1613), and the probability variation jackpot winning process is terminated and stopped. The process returns to the symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the probability variation big win winning process (S1509) in FIG. 35 described above, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is “chance” as compared to the case where only the stop symbol of the variable effect to be executed is changed to “chance eye”. The amount that can be changed to “eyes”, that is, “chance eyes” can be displayed once more. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbols, even if the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are changing at high speed. The 3rd symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol (the main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. The stop symbol of can be changed to “Chance Eye”.

  Therefore, only when all three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the stop symbol is changed more than when changing the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to “chance”. A possible period (changeable period) can be secured for a long time. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is contained in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If column Z2 is changing at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in middle symbol column Z2, and change the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect to “chance” it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured.

  In addition, when normal reach fluctuation is being executed, the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are always the same. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so even after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, 5 seconds. If the third symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to the “chance eye”. Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance effect as long as the changeable period can be secured, compared to the case where the stop symbol during the change effect is changed to “chance”. Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol replacement process (S 1606) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance”, and the above-described probability variation big win winning process (see FIG. 35) and the normal jackpot mentioned later. This is a process executed in the winning process (see FIG. 37).

  In the stop symbol replacement process (S1606), first, it is determined whether the stop symbol set flag 273i of the RAM 273 is on (S2301). If the stop symbol set flag 273i is off (S2301: No). This is a case where the stop symbol command has not yet been received and the stop symbol is not set. In this case, without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are changed together and the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”.

  That is, the third symbol arrangement information (information indicating the arrangement of the third symbol) is obtained from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or missed chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table (S2302). The displayed third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2303). Next, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information of the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the stop symbol data storage area is obtained. It is stored in 276b (S2304). Then, the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON (S2305), and the stop symbol replacement process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if the stop symbol set flag 273i is on (S2301: Yes), are all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed changing at high speed? Is determined (S2306). When all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stopped symbols in the variation effect being executed are changing at high speed (S2306: Yes), the third symbol is not replaced for each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, all the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are collectively changed, and the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2302.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2306, when not all of the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the stopped symbols in the variation effect being executed are changing at high speed (S2306: No), that is, at least one symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3. Is displayed in a stopped state, or when the speed is changing at low speed (medium speed fluctuation), the third symbol arrangement information stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S2307). Next, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information are respectively acquired (S2308).

  Then, it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is a deviation variation (S2309). If the variation effect being executed is other than a deviation variation (that is, a normal reach variation) (S2309: No), it is acquired. It is determined whether the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information is a reach chance (symbol) (S2310). When the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information is the reach chance (symbol) (S2310: Yes), the replacement of the third symbol is unnecessary, and thus this stop symbol replacement process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information is other than the reach chance eye (symbol) (S2310: No), the process proceeds to S2314.

  In the processing of S2309, when the variation effect being executed is a deviation variation (S2309: Yes), it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in S2308 have the same symbol (main symbol). (S2311). When the same symbol is present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S2311: Yes), the symbol symbol Z1 and Z3 are common to the symbol symbol rows Z1 and Z3 from the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 acquired in the processing of S2308. Then, one existing third symbol (the same main symbol) is selected (S2314). Then, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the processing of S2308 is replaced so that the chance symbol is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2315), and the process proceeds to S2316.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2311, when there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S2311: No), the third symbol (main symbol) is selected from the upper symbol row Z1 acquired in S2308. One is selected (S2312). Then, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 acquired in the process of S2308 are replaced so that the chance symbol is constituted by the selected third symbol (S2313).

  Next, the 3rd symbol arrangement | sequence information which shows the stop symbol (chance eyes) newly comprised by replacement | exchange of a 3rd symbol is memorize | stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2316). Then, only the stop symbol data of the portion changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced in the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2317). Specifically, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired from the character ROM 275 and replaced (changed). ) Only the stop symbol data corresponding to the portion is overwritten in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the stop symbol replacement process is terminated, and the process returns to the probability variation jackpot winning process (see FIG. 35) or the normal jackpot winning process (see FIG. 37).

  According to the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) of FIG. 36 described above, when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed has not yet been set, and each symbol row Z1, Z2, of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed. When Z3 is changing at high speed, all symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are changed and stopped without changing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. The design has been changed to a chance. Therefore, the third symbol to be replaced is determined for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 (in the symbol row unit), and the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z2 are arranged so that the third symbol falls within each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3. It is not necessary to replace the third symbol every Z3 (in symbol row units). Therefore, since the stop symbol can be changed to a chance by a simple process, the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, in the processing of S2317, only the stop symbol data of the part changed by the replacement of the third symbol is replaced among the stop symbol data already stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Therefore, the stop symbol data of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in which the low speed fluctuation (or medium speed fluctuation) is started. Without affecting the stop symbol data, it is possible to replace (change) only the stop symbol data of the non-stop-displayed symbol strings Z1, Z2, and Z3. Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed while accurately stopping and displaying the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed has not yet been set, and when each of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol in the variation effect being executed is changing at high speed. And all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, Z3 are collectively changed, and the stop symbol is changed to chance, but the third symbol to be replaced for each symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 is determined, The stop symbol may be changed to a chance by replacing the third symbol for each symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3.

  In addition, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol (third symbol), only the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced to minimize the change of the third symbol row. The stop symbol has been changed to a chance. Therefore, since the process for replacing the third symbol is reduced as compared with the case where the third symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, if there is the same symbol (third symbol) in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, only the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced, and the stop symbol is regarded as a chance. However, the stop symbol may be changed to the chance by replacing the third symbol row Z3 and the third symbol row Z2 respectively.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, replacement of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol will be described. In the following description, only an example in which the variable display is horizontally scrolled (in the direction of arrow X in the figure) will be described. However, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the upper symbol row Z1 is changed to the left symbol row Z1 ′. In addition, the middle symbol row Z2 may be replaced with the middle symbol row Z2 ′, and the lower symbol row Z3 may be replaced with the right symbol row Z3 ′.

  FIG. 42 illustrates an example of replacing the third symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and FIG. An example of replacing the third symbol only in the middle symbol row Z2 among the three middle and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 42, an example of replacing the third symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 will be described. FIG. 42A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m after the third symbol is replaced (after change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), “11” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “11” is stored in the second area, and “11” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” are sequentially displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 from left to right. "Is displayed.

  Similarly, the middle symbol row Z2 includes a symbol row arranged in order from left to right, “Angkou (6)”, “shellfish”, “Dugong (7)”, and the lower symbol row Z3 includes a left symbol row. In order from the right to the right, a symbol row along with “shellfish”, “turtle (3)”, and “shellfish” is displayed. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate stop symbols that are completely out of symbol displayed in the variation of out.

  As described above, when the deviation variation is executed, and there is no same symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the low symbol variation of the lower symbol row Z3 is started (less than 9 seconds). The stop symbol can be changed until. Here, in order to change the stop symbol, one third symbol (main symbol) must be selected from the upper symbol row Z1, but there is only “shark” in this stop symbol. Therefore, in this case, the third symbols of the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are replaced so that “shark” enters the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, respectively.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (9)", "shell", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right. Further, the lower symbol row Z3 is replaced with a symbol row lined up with "turtle (9)", "shellfish", and "shark (4)" in order from left to right.

  When the symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are replaced in this way, the symbol “shark” is displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. Since it enters, the stop symbol becomes a chance.

  If the stop symbol can be changed to the chance, the array number “5” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, and the changed lower symbol row Z3 is indicated. The array element number “5” is stored in the third area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, a chance item is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for stopping the variation effect being executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the deviation variation is executed and the same symbol is present in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol, before the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started (10 The stop symbol can be changed until less than a second). The description of the replacement of the third symbol is the same as that of the third symbol and is omitted.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol is replaced so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3 so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2. You can go. Further, for example, when there are two main symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 so that the stop symbol becomes a chance by one of the main symbols. Can be changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, an example in which only the middle symbol row Z2 of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is replaced with the third symbol will be described.

  FIG. 43A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m before the third symbol is replaced (before the change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the contents. b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the display symbol pattern memory 273m after the third symbol is replaced (after change) and an example of a stop symbol corresponding to the content.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), “11” is stored in the first area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m, “10” is stored in the second area, and “6” is stored in the third area. Suppose that In this state, when a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, “shell”, “shark (4)”, “shell” are sequentially displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 from left to right. "Is displayed.

  Similarly, in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol rows arranged in the order of "shellfish", "angko (6)", and "shellfish" in order from left to right, and in the lower symbol row Z3, from left to right. In order, a symbol row along with “shell”, “shark (4)”, and “shell” is displayed. That is, these symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 indicate the stop symbols of the reach symbols other than the front and rear deviations displayed in various reach fluctuations. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol is changed to the chance only when the deviation fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation is executed, and it is assumed here that the normal reach fluctuation is executed.

  As described above (see FIG. 12), when the normal reach variation is being executed, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 of the stop symbol always have the same symbol (main symbol), and the middle symbol row Z2 If it is less than 5 seconds even after the low-speed fluctuation is started, the third symbol of the non-stop display of the middle symbol row Z2 can be changed.

  Here, in order to change the stop symbol, it is necessary to select one same third symbol (main symbol) from the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. "There is only. Therefore, in this case, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced so that “shark” enters the middle symbol row Z2. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced with a symbol row lined with “shark (4)”, “shell”, and “octopus (1)” in order from left to right.

  When the middle symbol row Z2 is replaced in this way, the symbol “shark” is placed in the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, the stop symbol becomes the reach chance.

  If the stop symbol can be changed to the reach chance, the array element number “19” indicating the changed middle symbol row Z2 is stored in the second area of the display symbol pattern memory 273m. As a result, a chance item is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for stopping the variation effect being executed.

  The replacement of the third symbol described above is an example. For example, the third symbol may be replaced so that the “shark” symbol is arranged on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. Also, for example, when two identical main symbols are included in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the stop symbol becomes an opportunity by either one of the main symbols, What is necessary is just to change the symbol row Z2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) of the effect control device 117. The normal jackpot winning process (S1510) is a process for determining whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect whose final lottery result is “normal jackpot” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the stopped symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In the normal jackpot winning process (S1510), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 45) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1701). Next, in the entire stop symbol instruction storage table (including the execution area), the number of “setting value: out” following the preceding area is counted from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored. The number is continuous (S1702). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive continuations is 4 (maximum value) (S1703). If the number of consecutive continuations is 4 (S1703: Yes), each area from the execution area to the third reserved area is set to “ This is a case where “setting value: out” is stored, and “setting value: winning (normal)” is stored in the fourth reserved area. Here, when the chance chance effect is started and the “chance eye” is displayed from the variation effect that is being executed, the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” in the chance chance effect is 5 times or more. The stop pattern of the change production is not changed. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1709. That is, since the final lottery result is “ordinary jackpot”, the process proceeds to S1709 in order to limit the number of continuous display of “chance” to a maximum of four times.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1703, when the number of consecutive continuations is other than 4 (any one of 0 to 3) (S1703: No), the set value of the execution area is the forefront in the counted “set value: out”. It is determined whether or not “setting value: out of” (S1704). Among the counted “setting value: out”, when the setting value in the execution area is the foremost “setting value: out” (S1704: Yes), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the variation effect being executed. First, it is determined whether “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1705).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1704, when the set value of the execution area is not the foremost “set value: out” in the counted “set value: out” (S1704: No), the execution is scheduled (not executed). Since it is a case where only the change effect stop symbol is changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the processing of S1705, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is being executed (S1705: Yes), the execution of the fluctuation effect being executed (that is, the reach effect) rather than the start of the continuous chance eye effect. Prioritize continuation. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1709. This is because, as described above, the “super reach variation” or “special reach variation” reach effect generally has a higher gaming value than the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1705, when “super reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” is not executed (S1705: No), there is a possibility of changing the stop pattern of the fluctuation effect being executed. Then, it is determined whether the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706). When the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is off (S1706: No), since the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed, the process proceeds to S1709.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is on (S1706: Yes), it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is changed. In this case, a stop symbol replacement process is executed (S1606). Note that the stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 36) is a process for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed to “chance” as described above. When this stop symbol replacement process is executed, among the stop symbols of the variation effect being executed, the third symbol of each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′) that is changing at high speed is replaced, Stop symbol is changed to “Chance”.

  When the stop symbol replacement process (S1606) ends, next, 1 is added to the chance number continuous number counter 273c (S1707). In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed. Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, the setting values of each area from the area where the previous winning setting value is stored to the execution area are all changed to “setting value: chance” (S1708), The process proceeds to S1712.

  In the processing of S1709, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. The number of “off” is counted to determine the number of consecutive out (S1709). Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1710).

  When the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1710: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained by using the variation effect of the previous winning (scheduled) and the variation effect of the current winning (scheduled). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, the “setting value” that follows the preceding area from the area in which the previous winning setting value is stored is stored. : "Off" are all changed to "set value: chance" (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1712.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1710, if the number of consecutive continuations is less than 1 (S1710: No), this is a case where the continuous chance winning effect cannot be started. 34).

  In the processing of S1712, the “setting value: jackpot” of the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table is changed to “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” (S1712). ). Then, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: skip after jackpot” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize should be stored (S1713), and this normal jackpot winning process is terminated and stopped. The process returns to the symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the normal jackpot winning process (S1510) in FIG. 37 described above, as in the case of the probable big winning prize process (see FIG. 35), only the stop symbol of the variable effect scheduled to be executed is changed to “chance”. In comparison, it is possible to display the “chance eye” as many times as possible, that is, the amount of change that can be changed to the “chance eye” for the change effect being executed. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbols, even if the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3 are changing at high speed. The 3rd symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol (the main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1) is placed in the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3. The stop symbol of can be changed to “Chance Eye”.

  Therefore, only when all three upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changing at high speed, the stop symbol is changed more than when changing the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to “chance”. A possible period (changeable period) can be secured for a long time. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, the chances of performing the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In particular, if the same main symbol is contained in the upper and lower symbol rows Z1, Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stop symbol, the middle symbol If column Z2 is changing at high speed, replace (change) the third symbol so that the same main symbol is included in middle symbol column Z2, and change the stop symbol during the fluctuation effect to “chance” it can.

  Therefore, the stop symbol can be changed when the same main symbol is included in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. Since a longer period (changeable period) can be ensured, the chances of performing a continuous chance eye effect can be further increased as long as the changeable period can be secured.

  In addition, when normal reach fluctuation is being executed, the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the upper, lower, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are always the same. The main symbol is included, and even if the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, the time until the stop display (10 seconds) is long, so even after the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is started, 5 seconds. If the third symbol is replaced (changed) so that the same main symbol is included in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect can be changed to the “chance eye”. Therefore, only when the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, the opportunity to perform the continuous chance effect as long as the changeable period can be secured, compared to the case where the stop symbol during the change effect is changed to “chance”. Can be further increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the front / rear reach reach winning process (S1512) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the front / rear reach reach winning process (S1512) of the effect control device 117. The back-and-forth losing reach winning process (S1512) is a process for determining whether to start a continuous chance stage effect whose final lottery result is “out (chance)” based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. This is a process executed in the above-described stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  In this front / rear miss reach winning process (S1512), first, each set value of the stop symbol instruction storage table (see the left diagram of FIG. 46) of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S1801).

  Next, in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: deviation” following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the previous winning prize is stored. Are counted as the number of consecutive deviations (S1802). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead. Here, as in the process of S1602 in FIG. 35 and the process of S1702 in FIG. 37, the “lot value: out” of each area up to the execution area is not counted because the final lottery result is This is because the stop symbol being executed is not changed in the case of a continuous chance effect that is “out (chance)”.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 3 (maximum value) (S1803). If the number of consecutive continuations is 3 (S1803: Yes), each area from the first reserved area to the third reserved area Is stored in the fourth reserved area, and “set value: out (previous back and forth)” is stored.

  Here, when the “chance eye” is displayed from the variation effect scheduled to be executed first after the continuous chance eye effect is started, the number of continuous display of the “chance eye” in the continuous chance eye effect is 4 times, and 3 times. Will be exceeded. Therefore, in this case, the stop symbol of the variation effect scheduled to be executed first is not “chance”. Therefore, in the stop symbol instruction storage table, “setting value: out” of the first reserved area is changed to “setting value: first skip” (S1804), and the process proceeds to S1806.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, when the number of consecutive continuations is other than 3 (any one of 0 to 2) (S1803: No), it is determined whether the number of consecutive continuations is 1 or more (S1805). When the number of consecutive consecutive misses is 1 or more (S1805: Yes), at least the consecutive chances are obtained using the variation effect of the previous winning (to be executed) and the variation effect of the current winning (to be executed). Production can be performed. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, in the process of S1805, when the number of consecutive misses is less than 1 (S1805: No), this is a case in which the continuous chance effect production cannot be started, so this front / back miss reach winning process is terminated and the stop symbol instruction storage table update process ( Return to FIG.

  In the processing of S1806, “setting value: following the area ahead from the area where the setting value of the current winning prize is stored in the holding area (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the stop symbol instruction storage table. All “off” are changed to “set value: chance” (S1806). Then, “setting value: skip after losing” is set in the area in which the set value of the next winning prize is stored in the stop symbol instruction storing table (S1807). The process returns to the stop symbol instruction storage table update process (see FIG. 34).

  According to the above-described front / rear miss reach winning process (S1512) in FIG. 38, “setting value: skip after losing” can be set in the area for storing the set value of the next winning in the stop symbol instruction storage table. . Therefore, because the stop symbol of the next variable effect after the continuous chance effect production has ended can be a stop symbol other than “chance eye”, the final chance result is “out (chance eye)”. Is executed, it is possible to reliably limit the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” to 3 times.

  For example, after the end of a continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), another continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession) is executed. Then, it seems as if the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance” was performed six times in a row. However, in the present embodiment, since the stop pattern of the next fluctuation effect after the continuous chance eye effect has been finished can always be a stop symbol other than “chance eye”, the continuous chance eye effect is executed continuously. Can be prevented.

  In addition, for example, after the end of the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), the final chance that the final lottery result is “normal jackpot” (for example, “Chance” Even when “eye” is displayed four times in succession, it appears as if the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol “chance eye” is performed seven times in succession. However, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the continuous chance effect from being continuously executed for the same reason as described above, so that the continuous chance effect can be accurately executed. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the changing effect setting process (S1407) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the changing effect setting process (S1407) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect setting process (S1407) is a process for setting the variation effect data necessary for starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, each time a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command are received. It is a process to be executed. This process is executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In this variation effect setting process (S1407), first, the variation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is set to ON, and the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to OFF (S1901). As described above, the variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. The stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the changing effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command and effect time addition command, and stored in the fluctuation time memory 273d (S1902). As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating the variation time of the variation effect to be executed (variation effect pattern), and the effect time addition command is the extension time or shortening time of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command.

  Next, the set value of each area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is shifted by one area in the direction of the execution area (forward) (S1903). As described above, each area is in the order of “next reserved area” → “fourth reserved area” → “third reserved area” → “second reserved area” → “first reserved area” → “execution area”. It is assumed that it continues ahead. That is, the setting value of “first holding area” is shifted to “execution area”, and the setting value of “second holding area” is shifted to “first holding area”. In the same manner, the setting value of “third holding area” is set to “second holding area”, the setting value of “fourth holding area” is set to “third holding area”, and the setting value of “next holding area” is set to “ Shift to the “fourth reserved area”.

  In the present embodiment, the data (setting value) is shifted only for the area where the setting value is stored. Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed in the area where the set value is not stored, the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, the data (setting value) of each area may be shifted to the area ahead by one area regardless of the presence or absence of the setting value. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored in each area, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 272 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b (S1904), and the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is acquired (S1905). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S1906), and the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & chance hit & If it is “probable variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance chance & normal jackpot” (S1906: Yes), pseudo-variation setting processing is executed (S1907).

  The pseudo-variation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. However, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable big hit” or “normal big win”, the fluctuation of the last variation effect is changed. This is a process for deciding whether to increase the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” based on time. When this pseudo variation setting process (S1907) ends, the variation effect setting process ends, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1906, when the acquired setting value is other than “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S1906: No), the variation of the variation time memory 273d Fluctuation effect data corresponding to time is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S1908). The obtained variation effect data is stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S1909).

  Next, it is determined whether the variation time of the variation time memory 273d is a variation time of an outlier variation or a normal reach variation (S1910). If the variation time is a variation time of an outlier variation or a normal reach variation (S1910: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to ON (S1911), the variation effect setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when the fluctuation time is a fluctuation time other than a deviation fluctuation or a normal reach fluctuation (S1910: Yes), the process of S1911 is skipped, the fluctuation effect setting process is terminated, and the command reception Return to the loading process (see FIG. 33).

  39, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g can be set to ON only when the deviation fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation starts to be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1907) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of the effect control device 117. The pseudo-variation setting process (S1907) is performed based on the variation time of the last variation effect when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable variation jackpot” or “normal jackpot”. This is a process for determining whether to increase the number of continuous displays. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 39).

  In this pseudo variation setting process (S1907), first, the variation time stored in the variation time memory 273d of the RAM 273 is acquired (S2001), and the obtained variation time is the variation time of “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”. Is determined (S2002). In addition, as described above, in the variation production in which the winning lottery result is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation ( The variation effect of any pattern is selected from each pattern of “60 seconds)” (see FIG. 21).

  In the process of S2002, when the obtained fluctuation time is the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: Yes), instead of the normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds), the chance normal fluctuation (20 seconds) ( This is a case of executing FIG. Note that the number of continuous display of “chance” is not changed. In this case, 1 is stored in the pseudo change chance display number memory 273k of the RAM 273 (S2003), and change effect data of “chance eye normal change (20 seconds)” is acquired from the character ROM 275 (S2004), and S2012. Move on to processing.

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k is used when “chance eye normal change”, “chance eye super change A to D”, or “chance eye special change A to F” is executed. This is a memory for storing the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” in the variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when the acquired fluctuation time is not the fluctuation time of “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)” (S2002: No), the value of the chance eye display number selection counter 273j in the RAM 273 is acquired and the value is obtained. Are stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k (S2005).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table is “chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2006). When the set value of the execution area is “chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2006: Yes), the total value of the value of the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-variable chance eye display number memory 273k is 4. It is determined whether it exceeds (S2007).

  When the total value of the value of the chance number consecutive number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-variable chance number display number memory 273k exceeds 4 (S2007: Yes), the final lottery result is “normal jackpot”. In the continuous chance production, the number of continuous display of the “chance” exceeds 4 times, so it is limited to a maximum of 4 times. Therefore, “the value of the 4-chance consecutive number counter 273c” is calculated, and the result is stored in the pseudo-variable chance display number memory 273k (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when the set value of the execution area is “chance eye & probability change big hit” (S2006: No), each process of S2007 and S2008 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2009. In addition, in the process of S2007, when the total value of the value of the chance continuous number counter 273c and the value of the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k is 4 or less (S2007: No), the process of 2008 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S2009.

  In the process of S2009, it is determined whether or not the acquired variation time is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)” (S2009), and the obtained variation time is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”. In some cases (S2009: Yes), instead of the super reach variation (40 seconds), any one of the chance eye super variations A to D (40 seconds) (see FIG. 7) is executed. Note that there is a possibility that the number of continuous display of “chance” will increase.

  In this case, one piece of variation effect data for displaying the same number of “chance eyes” as the value stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k is stored in the character ROM 275 “chance eye super variation A˜. D ”is obtained from each variation effect data (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2012.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when the acquired variation time is the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)” (S2009: No), it is replaced with the special reach variation (60 seconds), instead of the chance special variation A. ~ F (for 40 seconds) (see FIG. 8) is executed. Note that there is a possibility that the number of continuous display of “chance” will increase.

  In this case, one piece of variation effect data for displaying the same number of “chance eyes” as the value stored in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k and “chance eyes special change A˜” stored in the character ROM 275 are displayed. F ”is obtained from each variation effect data (S2011), and the process proceeds to S2012.

  In the process of S2012, the fluctuation effect data acquired in the process of S2004, the process of S2010, or the process of S2011 is stored in the fluctuation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276 (S2012), and the pseudo-variation setting process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 39).

  According to the pseudo variation setting process (S1907) of FIG. 40 described above, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance effect is “probable big success” or “normal big success”, the variation time of the last variation production is “ If the fluctuation time of “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)” or the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, it is possible to increase the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes”. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuating effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small and the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” is small, the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, the player improves the sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state each time the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” increases. As a result, the player increases the number of continuous display of “chance eyes”. In response, you will be angry. Therefore, a highly interesting game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, even when the number of variation effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small, the number of variation effects executed apparently increases, so that the variation effect in the continuous chance effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a player having a monotonous impression of a game and to provide a game with high interest.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the last variation effect is the variation time of “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”, the variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, “special reach variation ( 60 seconds) ”, and one of“ chance eye normal fluctuation ”,“ chance eye super fluctuation A to D ”, and“ chance eye special fluctuation A to F ”is executed. Yes. On the other hand, only when the variation time of the last variation production is the variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)” and the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, “normal reach” is at least once. It may be configured such that the number of continuous display of “chance” is increased after “variation (20 seconds)” is executed. Specifically, if the variation time of the last variation production is a variation time of “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, one of “chance eyes super variation B, C” is executed, If the variation time of the last variation effect is the variation time of “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, one of “chance eye special variation B to E” is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of continuous display of “chance” and to execute “normal reach fluctuation” or “special reach fluctuation” at least once. As mentioned above, normal reach fluctuations and super reach fluctuations each generate reach and perform flashy effects, giving players a sense of expectation for a gaming state that is advantageous. The combination of the increase in the number of continuous displays and the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation for a gaming state can further enhance the player's expectation. Therefore, the expectation given to the player can be changed depending on whether the number of consecutive display of “chance” is increased or not, so that the player is monotonous with the game. It is possible to avoid having an impression and provide a game with high interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the stop symbol setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of the effect control device 117. The stop symbol setting process (S1411) is a process for setting a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or starts to be executed, and is executed every time a stop symbol command is received. It is processing. Further, it is a process executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  In the stop symbol setting process (S1411), it is first determined whether or not the stop symbol set flag 273i of the RAM 273 is ON (S2101). As described above, the stop symbol set flag 273i is a flag that is turned on when the stop symbol of the variation effect that is started (or started) in the third symbol display device 81 is set. Here, the case where the stop symbol set flag 273i is already ON means that the winning information command is received before the stop symbol command within the changeable period after the execution of the variation effect is started. This is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started (or being executed) is set to “chance eye”.

  If the stop symbol set flag 273i is on in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), the above-described stop symbol replacement process (see FIG. 36) is executed, and the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed is already set. In this case, the stop symbol setting process is terminated without doing anything, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33). On the other hand, if the stop symbol set flag 273i is OFF in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), the setting value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table of the stop symbol instruction storage table memory 273a is acquired (S2102). .

  Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2103), and the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance chance” If “Eye & Probability Bonus” or “Set Value: Chance Eye & Normal Bonus” (S2103: Yes), the final lottery result is “Continuous Bonus” or “Normal Bonus”. This is a case where the stop symbol of the last variation effect is set.

  In this case, the third symbol arrangement information (first chance area or reach chance eye area) from the chance eye area (reach chance eye area or missed chance eye area) in the stop symbol pattern table by the value in the pseudo-change chance display number memory 273k of the RAM 273. (Information indicating the arrangement of the three symbols) is acquired (S2104). Note that, as described above, the stop symbol pattern table is constantly updated (eg, every 5 ms) from when the power is turned on until it is shut off, so the value of each area (arrangement of the third symbol of the stop symbol) Every time information is acquired, an irregular value is acquired.

  For example, in the process of S2104, only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reaching chance” may be acquired, or only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “missing chance” may be acquired. Further, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance” and the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “off chance” may be acquired. In this way, it is possible to change the “chance eyes” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance eye effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression of the game. It is possible to avoid and provide a game with high interest.

  Note that, as described above, the pseudo-change chance eye display number memory 273k indicates that the chance effect normal change, the chance eye super-changes A to D, or the chance eye special changes A to F are executed. This is a memory in which the number of continuous display of “chance” is stored. Normally, in the case of a fluctuating production where the lottery result is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, “normal reach fluctuation (20 seconds)”, “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds) ) ”Is selected from among the patterns (see FIG. 21). However, since the final lottery result this time is the last fluctuation effect of the continuous chance eye effect that is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, as described above (see FIG. 40), normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation Instead of each of the special reach fluctuations, any one of the chance normal fluctuations, the chance super fluctuations A to D, or the chance special fluctuations A to F is executed.

  Next, stop symbol data (third symbol image data) necessary for constructing a stop symbol corresponding to each third symbol arrangement information acquired in the processing of S2104 is acquired from the character ROM 275, and the video RAM 276 Each is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b (S2305). Then, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2106), and among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), the area corresponding to the extracted stop symbol pattern The third symbol arrangement information is acquired from (S2107). In other words, in the process of S2107, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “probability variation jackpot symbol” or “normal jackpot symbol” is acquired.

  Next, the acquired third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2108), and the stop symbol data necessary for configuring the stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m. (Image data of the third symbol) is acquired from the character ROM 275 and added to the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 and stored (S2309). Thereby, the stop symbol data of “chance eyes” and “probability big hit symbol” or “normal jackpot symbol” displayed in the last variation effect are stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b.

  In the process of S2106 described above, the stop symbol pattern is acquired from the received stop symbol command. However, even if the set value acquired in S2102 is used, the final stop symbol is “probable big hit symbol” or “normal big hit symbol”. Therefore, the stop symbol pattern may be extracted based on the set value acquired in S2102 instead of the received stop symbol command.

  Then, the value of the pseudo-changing chance display number memory 273k is added to the chance continuous number counter 273c (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2118. In addition, as described above, the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2103, when the acquired setting value is not “setting value: chance eye & probability variation jackpot” or “setting value: chance eye & normal jackpot” (S2103: No), the acquired setting value is It is determined whether or not “setting value: chance chance” (S2111). If the acquired setting value is “setting value: chance chance” (S2111: Yes), 1 is added to the chance eye consecutive number counter 273c (S2112), and the chance eye area (reach) in the stop symbol pattern table is reached. The third symbol arrangement information is acquired from the chance eye area or the missed chance area (S2113).

  For example, in the process of S2113, whether the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “miss chance eye” or the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance eye” is acquired according to the variation effect pattern being executed. . More specifically, if the variation effect pattern being executed is “outside change (11 seconds)”, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to “outside chance” is acquired. Further, if the variation effect pattern being executed is “normal reach variation (20 seconds)”, “super reach variation (40 seconds)”, or “special reach variation (60 seconds)”, it corresponds to “reach chance”. The third symbol arrangement information is acquired.

  In this way, it is possible to change the “chance eyes” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the continuous chance eye effect, so that the player has a monotonous impression of the game. It is possible to avoid and provide a game with high interest. Note that only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reaching chance” may be acquired, or only the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “missing chance” may be acquired. Further, the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “reach chance” and the third symbol arrangement information corresponding to the “off chance” may be acquired.

  On the other hand, if the acquired setting value is not “setting value: chance” in the processing of S2111 (S2110: No), it is a case where the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command may be set as it is. In this case, a stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command (S2114). Here, from the stop symbol command, one of the following symbols is extracted as a stop symbol pattern: “rear out of front / rear”, “reach other than front / rear out”, “complete out”, “probability big hit”, or “normal big hit”.

  Next, among the areas in the stop symbol pattern table (see FIG. 15A), the third symbol arrangement information is acquired from the area corresponding to the extracted stop symbol pattern (S2115). Then, the acquired third symbol arrangement information is stored in the display symbol pattern memory 273m (S2116), and stop symbol data (in order to construct a stop symbol corresponding to the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m) ( 3rd image data) is acquired from the character ROM 275 and stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276 (S2317).

  Thereby, stop symbol data which is image data of a stop symbol displayed in the variation effect is stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b. Then, the process proceeds to S2118. In the process of S2118, the stop symbol set flag 273i is set to ON (S2118), the stop symbol setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  When the stop symbol command is received by the stop symbol setting process (S1411) of FIG. 41, based on the set value of the execution area in the stop symbol instruction storage table and the stop symbol pattern indicated by the received stop symbol command. Thus, it is possible to set a stop symbol of a variation effect that is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 or that is to start executing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the stop symbol instruction storage table is provided. Therefore, when setting the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being executed or is to be started, simply set the stop symbol instruction storage table. An appropriate stop symbol can be set by referring to the setting value of the execution area and referring to the received stop symbol command only when necessary. In other words, every time a stop symbol command is received, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” that should be displayed in the continuous chance effect, the number of “chance eyes” displayed continuously after the start of the continuous chance effect, etc. Based on this situation, it is not necessary to make a determination to determine the stop symbol of the current variation effect and set an appropriate stop symbol. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop symbol instruction storage table is provided, but this is stopped, and a counter that counts the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” to be displayed in the continuous chance effect or a continuous chance effect A counter that counts the number of “chances” that have been displayed continuously since the start of the program is provided, and each time a stop symbol command is received, the variation effect of this time is based on the status of various counters. A determination to determine the stop symbol may be made and an appropriate stop symbol may be set.

  Next, referring to FIG. 27, a startup process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the effect control device 117. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, the power-on notification process is performed to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process is completed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275 and the video RAM 276 is displayed. (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1004).

  Next, the power-off process in progress flag is turned on to determine whether the current start-up process was executed because the MPU 271 was reset during the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) described later. It is determined based on whether or not it is present (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28, but when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command, the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received is stored in the RAM 273 and the power-off process ( Step S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. Note that if the power supply is completely shut off during execution of the power-off process or after completion of the execution, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after any of the following three states. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As a second state, a power interruption process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. , MPU 271 has been reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1011.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1011.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed because an instantaneous power failure has occurred, but the power is cut off. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  Next, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273 (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1009). . By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1010), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  In the process of S1011, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1011). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1117 in FIG. 28) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely shut down (see S1117 in FIG. 28). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: Yes), the work area of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117 (S1012), the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt is permitted. Is set (S1014), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 273 corresponds to the memories 273a to 273k of the RAM 273.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost). RAM 273 without resetting only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like and turning on the power-off flag (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Is stored.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1011: No), S1012 which is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1013, the initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1013), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1014, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason why the clear process in S1012 is skipped is that when only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the work area data in the RAM 273 is not cleared but saved. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued. For example, even if only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, the data can be used to continue the control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 273 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 273 is normally held, it is possible to continue using the data to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main process of the effect control device 117. The main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as sound output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 27) of the effect control device 117 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed. Process.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) (S1101), and after the previous determination (the process of S1101) is performed, If 1 msec or more has elapsed (S1101: Yes), an audio lamp effect process is executed (S1102). Note that the audio lamp effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, but is mainly a process for executing lighting control of various lamps and audio output control. When the sound lamp effect process (S1102) is completed, the process proceeds to S1103.

  On the other hand, if 1 msec or more has not elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1101) was executed (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103. The process of S1101 determines whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed, because the process of S1102 is mainly related to lamp lighting control and audio output control. This is because it is not necessary to execute in a short cycle (within 1 msec).

  In the process of S1103, it is determined whether 20 msec or more has elapsed since the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed (S1103), and 20 m after the previous determination (the process of S1103) was executed. If more than one second has elapsed (S1103: Yes), a variation effect process is executed (S1104). The variation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, but is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). When this variation effect process (S1104) ends, the process proceeds to S1105.

  On the other hand, if 20 milliseconds or more have not elapsed since the previous determination (the processing of S1103) was executed (S1103: No), the processing of S1104 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1105. The process of S1103 determines whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the previous determination was performed. The process of S1104 is based on the variation time of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). This is because it is a process to update in response, and therefore it is not necessary to execute it in a short cycle (within 20 milliseconds).

  In the process of S1105, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g of the RAM 273 is on (S1105). 273e is updated (S1106). As described above, the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is a flag that is turned on only during a period during which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. Therefore, if the flag is on, the variable effect is always executed. . Further, a deviation variation or a normal reach variation is always executed (see S1910 and S1911 in FIG. 39).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the variation time counter 273e is equal to or longer than the maximum changeable period (see FIG. 12A) corresponding to the variation effect being executed (S1107), and the value of the variation time counter 273e is the maximum value. If it is longer than the changeable period (S1107: Yes), it is a period in which the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed cannot be changed, and the process proceeds to S1112. In other words, in the process of S1107, it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed is a deviating effect for 10 seconds or longer, and if the normal reach variation is 15 seconds or longer.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1107, if the value of the variation time counter 273e is less than the maximum changeable period corresponding to the variation effect being executed (S1107: No), it is determined whether the variation effect being executed is out of variation. Determination is made (S1108). If the variation effect being executed is other than deviating variation (that is, normal reach variation) (S1108: No), the stop symbol can still be changed. Transition.

  On the other hand, when the variation effect being executed is out-of-range (S1108: Yes), the third symbol arrangement information in the display symbol pattern memory 273m is acquired (S1109). Then, it is determined whether the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have the same symbol among the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 corresponding to the acquired third symbol arrangement information. (S1110) If there is the same symbol (S1110: Yes), it is still possible to change the symbol that stops the deviation variation, so the processing of S1111 to S1112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1113.

  On the other hand, if there is no identical symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (S1110: No), it is determined in the third symbol display device 81 whether the upper symbol row Z1 has stopped (S1111). When the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped (including during medium speed fluctuation and during low speed fluctuation) (S1111: Yes), the stop symbol changeable period flag 273g is set to OFF because the stop symbol of outlier fluctuation cannot be changed. Then (S1112), the process proceeds to S1113.

  In the process of S1111, when the upper symbol row Z1 is changing at high speed in the third symbol display device 81 (S1111: No), since the stop symbol of the deviation fluctuation can be changed, the process of S1112 is skipped, and the process of S1113 Transition to processing.

  In the process of S1113, the chance number display number selection counter 273j of the RAM 273 is updated (S1113), and it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1114). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. In the process of S1114, when the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1114: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption process flag are turned on (S1116), and the power interruption process is executed (S1117). . After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output to the audio output device 226, the electrical decoration units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81. Turn off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  In the process of S1114, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1114: No), whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 (see the process of S1009 in FIG. 27). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1115: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1115 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 273 is destroyed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is good also as what performs notification of RAM destruction.

  Next, an audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the sound lamp effect process (S1102) of the effect control device 117. The sound lamp effect process (S1102) is mainly a process for executing lamp lighting control and sound output control, and is a process executed in the above-described main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1205 described later. (S1201). Then, the customer waiting effect process of S1202 is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1203). In the customer waiting effect process, when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen. Further, in the hold number display update process, the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command transmitted from the main controller 110 and received.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1204). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current variation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production gives a sense of expectation to the jackpot It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1204 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1205), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1206). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1206, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1207), the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and received. The lamp editing process in S1205 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1206 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the changing effect process (S1104) executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating effect process (S1104) of the effect control device 117. The variation effect process (S1104) is a process for displaying a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), and is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) described above. Process.

  In the variation effect process (S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot is being hit) (S1301). If it is medium (S1301: Yes), the jackpot presentation process is executed (S1302). In the jackpot effect process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round (for example, the effect data is read from the character ROM 275 for each round, and the predetermined number in the video RAM 276 is set. Write to the area). After the big hit effect process (S1302) ends, the variable effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the changing effect is being executed (fluctuating) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1303). (S1303: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 273f of the RAM 273 is ON (S1304). As described above, the variation start flag 273f is a flag that is turned on when the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is instructed from the main control device 110, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command transmitted from main controller 110 are received (see S1407 in FIG. 33).

  If the variation start flag 273f is OFF in the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), other display processing is executed (S1313), and this variation effect processing is terminated. The other display process is, for example, a display process such as an effect of waiting for a customer to be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when the fluctuation start flag 273f is on (S1304: Yes), first, the fluctuation start flag 273f is turned off (S1305). Then, the variation time counter 273e of the RAM 273 is reset (set to 0), the variation time count is started (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1308. As described above, the variation time counter 273e is a counter that stores an elapsed time since the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the changing effect is being executed (changed) (S1303: Yes), the value of the changing time counter 273e is updated (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308. In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not it is within the variation effect time by checking whether or not a stop command transmitted from the main control device 110 has been received (S1308). For example, if it is between the start of the variation effect and the reception of the stop command, it is determined that it is within the variation effect time.

  In the process of S1308, when it is determined that the time is within the variation effect time (S1308: Yes), it is determined whether it is the stop symbol display time (S1309). For example, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the variation time counter 273e has reached the stop symbol display time set for the variation effect being executed, and when the elapsed time becomes the stop symbol display time, the stop symbol is displayed. It is determined that it is time to display.

  In the processing of S1309, if it is not the stop symbol display time yet (S1309: No), the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is used by using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a of the video RAM 276. ) Displays an image corresponding to the fluctuation effect data (fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) (S1310). As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation, and stop is image data of a stop symbol. This is performed based on the symbol data. Then, when the process of S1310 is completed, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if it is the stop symbol display time in the processing of S1309 (S1309: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 is used by using the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b of the video RAM 276. The stop symbol is displayed on the (LCD) (S1311). Then, the variation effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  In the processing of S1308, when it is not within the variation effect time (S1308: No), that is, when the variation effect time is over, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is suspended (S1312). For example, the display of a new image on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the displayed image remains displayed without change. When the process of S1312 ends, the variation effect process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 28).

  Through the above-described variation effect process (S1104) of FIG. 30, a moving image (image) and a stop symbol corresponding to the variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, a variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) can be performed based on the variation effect data and the stop symbol data. Specifically, when the variation effect is started, first, the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area 276a is read, and an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. Each time the stop symbol display time is reached, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area 276b is read and the stop symbol is displayed.

  That is, since the data used for one variation effect is stored in different storage areas 276a and 276b, and read out as necessary, it is within the variation effect time and before the display time of the stop symbol If so, the stop symbol data once set (stored) after the start of the variation effect can be rewritten (overwritten) with another stop symbol data. Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to “chance”.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to the “chance eye”, and furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol during the fluctuating production can be changed to “chance” during the fluctuating production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. In addition, the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is executed continuously at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In addition, when the final lottery result of the continuous chance stage production is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”, the fluctuation time of the last fluctuation production is the fluctuation time of “super reach fluctuation (40 seconds)”, or With the fluctuation time of “special reach fluctuation (60 seconds)”, the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, even when the number of fluctuating effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small and the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” is small, the number of continuous displays of “chance eyes” can be increased. Therefore, the player improves the sense of expectation for an advantageous gaming state each time the number of consecutive display of “chance eyes” increases. As a result, the player increases the number of continuous display of “chance eyes”. In response, you will be angry. Therefore, a highly interesting game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, even when the number of variation effects executed in the continuous chance effect is small, the number of variation effects executed apparently increases, so that the variation effect in the continuous chance effect can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a player having a monotonous impression of a game and to provide a game with high interest.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of the horizontal scroll is executed in the third symbol display device 81, a part of the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the stopped symbol is displayed. Even after the symbol row (upper symbol row Z1 or lower symbol row Z3) is stopped and displayed, the third symbol of the symbol row that is changing at high speed is replaced, and the stop symbol that is changing is changed to “chance”. However, after all of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbols of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be replaced so that the stopped symbols become “chance eyes”. For example, as soon as all the stopped symbols are displayed, an effect of exchanging all the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed, or an effect of exchanging only some of the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 may be performed. With this configuration, the stop symbol can be changed even after the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, so that the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period) can be ensured the longest. Therefore, as long as the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chance of performing the continuous chance effect. The same applies to the case where the vertical scroll variable display is executed.

  In the above embodiment, the variation effect data used for the variation effect and the stop symbol data used for the display of the stop symbol are stored separately, and the symbol sequence Z1, Z2, Z3 of the stop symbol is “chance”. The stop symbol data is changed so as to be “eye”, and the symbol sequences Z1, Z2, and Z3 that are scroll-displayed (fluctuated) so that the stop symbol is stopped and displayed are stopped. The remaining time until the stop symbol is displayed without storing the data is acquired, and when the remaining time elapses, the symbol row Z1, Z2, Z3 is displayed in the scroll display so that it stops at the “chance eye”. The symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 may be changed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display is horizontally scrolled in the third symbol display device 81, the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are configured to be displayed. The number of symbol columns is not limited to three, but may be one or two, or four or more. Similarly, when the variable display is vertically scrolled, the number of symbol columns may be other than three.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the continuous chance effect is executed, the variation effect in which the stop symbol becomes “chance” is continuously executed, but the stop symbol is “chance”. An effect in which the fluctuating effect is intermittently executed may be performed as a continuous chance eye effect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the determination whether to perform a continuous chance eye effect is performed in the effect control apparatus 117, it is determined whether the main control apparatus 110 performs a continuous chance eye effect instead. It is good also as composition which performs judgment. In the main control device 110, when it is determined whether or not the continuous chance eye effect is performed, the transmission / reception of the winning information command is unnecessary, so the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117 The number of command receptions can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce both the control burdens of the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, whenever the winning information command is received in the production | presentation control apparatus 117, the setting value according to the lottery result which the received winning information command shows is memorize | stored in a stop symbol instruction | indication storage table. Although configured, it may be configured to store setting values that can identify each lottery result. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result indicated by the received winning information command is “front / rear out of reach”, “setting value: front / rear out of reach” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. Similarly, “reach other than front / rear out of reach” for “reach other than front / rear out”, “set value: complete out” for “complete out”, “set value: probable big hit” for “probable big hit”, If it is “normal jackpot”, “setting value: normal jackpot” is newly stored in the stop symbol instruction storage table. With this configuration, the stop symbol pattern can be identified by referring to the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table. Therefore, every time a new variation effect is started, a stop symbol command indicating the stop symbol of the variation effect is issued. There is no need to send or receive. Therefore, the control burden can be reduced by both the main control device 110 and the production control device 117.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is ended with “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”, when the last change effect is started, one or more “chance eyes” are started. Is displayed, and then the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed. The stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” may be displayed by performing an effect as usual.

  In the above embodiment, the lottery result of the new winning is “normal jackpot”, and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). If “setting value: out” is stored from the execution area to the third reserved area in the stop symbol instruction storage table in order to limit the display of “chance” to a maximum of four consecutive times. Furthermore, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is not changed. Instead, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eyes”, and then the stop symbol of each variable effect from the first time to the third time is also changed to “chance eyes”. Then, in the stop pattern of the fourth variable effect, which is the last variable effect, the “chance eye” is displayed by simply displaying the stop symbol corresponding to “normal jackpot” without displaying the “chance eye”. May be limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” in the continuous chance effect production is “probable big hit (no limit)” and “normal big hit (up to 4 consecutive times)”. However, the maximum value may be set arbitrarily. However, the maximum value may be arbitrarily set.

  In the above embodiment, after the end of the continuous chance effect, another continuous chance effect is not performed. However, the continuous chance effect may be performed continuously. . For example, when consecutive chance chance effects are performed continuously, each successive chance effect is continuously executed, so that the total number of “chance eyes” displayed as if they are consecutive is the subsequent consecutive Do not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the final lottery result of the chance eye production. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance production is “probable big hit”, the number of continuous display of “chance eye” is not limited. If it is “reach or missed chance”, the maximum is 3 consecutive times. As a result, the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as the “chance” increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the sound effect during the changing effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal changing effect. This sound effect allows the player to recognize that the continuous chance stage production is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. Furthermore, after setting the stop symbol as “chance eye”, the effect sound during the dynamic effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third symbol, etc.) May be changed to a different sound effect.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the lighting parts 29 to 33 during the change effect and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (the aspect of the dynamic display effect) may be changed to a pattern different from that during the normal change effect. Since the player can recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced by the lighting pattern different from the normal, it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game. In addition to setting the stop symbol as “chance eye”, the lighting patterns 29 to 33 and the lighting pattern of the display lamp 34 (mode of dynamic display) during the variation production are also in the normal variation production. You may change to a different pattern.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above embodiment, a variable effect is continuously performed with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)”. It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the aspect of the dynamic display effect is the same) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be performed successively in a predetermined order. By this special variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance effect production of the above embodiment, a variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye (missing chance eye, reach chance eye)” is continuously performed. The sound (the mode of sound effect of dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) is changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal variation effect, or the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamps during the variation effect. The 34 lighting patterns (modes of dynamic display effects) may be changed to patterns different from those during normal fluctuation effects, or special fluctuation effects different from normal may be continuously performed. Moreover, you may carry out combining each two or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, control of audio output, control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps, and control of variation effect (variation display) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 are collectively performed. Although it is configured to be performed by the production control device 117, various controls may be performed by being shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, the voice lamp control device controls the sound output and the lighting and extinction of various lamps, and controls the control of the third symbol variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. You may comprise so that it may be performed with an apparatus.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure where the 1st entrance 64 was provided as an entrance where a jackpot determination is started, this 1st entrance may be two or more. . And it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect) in accordance with the first entrance where the game ball has won.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when determining the production pattern (front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, complete out) displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, based on the counter value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Although determined, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not provided, and the determination is made based on the counter values of the other counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, and variable type counters CS1 to CS3). You may comprise so that it may do. The effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes one counter value of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, a counter value of the first random number counter C1, and a counter of the first type counter C2. Or the counter value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the counter value of the first per-type counter C2. May be determined.

  Further, in the first random number counter C1 in the above embodiment, the numerical value in the range of 0 to 738 is counted, but the range to be counted may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count a numerical value in the range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 2 bytes (a range that can be counted by 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 that is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes may be counted, or 0 to 32768 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Similarly, the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment counts a value in the range of 0 to 4, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 counts a value in the range of 0 to 238. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count the numerical values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 1 byte (the range that can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are composed of 1 byte, numerical values in the range of 0 to 255, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte, may be counted. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1” and other bits have a bit value of “0”) may be counted.

  Here, when the probability is calculated using the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and the one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only for every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set for every 0.1%. That is, the wider the counting range, the easier the fine adjustment of the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common to produce models with the same variation effect and jackpot effect but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine so that you can easily fine-tune the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily made for each model, and the design burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although comprised so that the pending | holding number command may be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the production | presentation control apparatus 117, you may comprise so that a pending | holding number command may not be transmitted. That is, in the production control device 117, the special figure reservation ball number N is stored in the special figure reservation ball counter 273b of the RAM 273, so that the special figure reservation ball number N can be known without receiving the reservation number command. That is, in this case, the same number of lamps as the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 273b are configured to be lit in the special figure reservation lamp 85. As a result, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the effect control device 117 can be reduced, thereby reducing both the control burden on the main control device 110 and the effect control device 117. Can do.

  In the above embodiment, the “variable direction command” is provided. However, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like not provided with the “variable direction command”. In the above embodiment, the “calculation time addition command” is provided, but the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like that is not provided with the “calculation time addition command”.

  In the embodiment described above, the main control device 110 determines the changing effect and the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 A fluctuating effect or a notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. For example, the effect control device 117 determines a changing effect or a notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the stop symbol instruction storage table when a winning information command is received. When the effect control device 117 determines the changing effect or the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure holding lamp 85 displays the number of holds for the first entrance 64. You may or may not do it. In the case where the hold number is not displayed, the number of transmissions of the hold number command in the main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85. However, without providing the special figure reservation lamp 85, the special figure reservation ball number N is displayed in the third symbol. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, the display is performed so that the number of holdings is visually distinguishable (for example, a number or a four-divided area is displayed as a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) that is different by the number of holdings). To do. In addition, the special figure reservation ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85, and the special figure reservation ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it comprised so that a prize to the 1st entrance 64 could be held at maximum 4 times, the maximum hold frequency is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special figure reservation ball number N of the first entrance 64. However, the counter 203c is not provided and the counter 203c is provided as necessary. (For example, at the start of a change), the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted) so as to obtain the special figure reserved ball number N of the first entrance 64. You may comprise. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead, it may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as an L-shape. Moreover, you may scroll diagonally. Further, it may be scrolled immediately before. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and it is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information is specific, and in this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown. Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information in the event that the display means is in control; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entry, the lottery information transmission means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and the entrance information Take by acquisition means And a dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means. The control means includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means, and lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means of the main control means. A lottery information receiving means, a mode information storage means for storing mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means, and a lottery information received by the lottery information receiving means. In such a case, a change permission determination unit that determines whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode based on the content of the mode information storage unit. The first change means for changing the dynamic display mode being executed by the dynamic display execution means to the predetermined mode when the change permission determination means determines that the change is possible, and the first change For each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by means, the dynamic display is executed in the predetermined mode, or the dynamic display is different from the dynamic display instead of the dynamic display. A gaming machine A1 comprising a predetermined mode executing means for executing a plurality of target displays in the predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the detection means detects the entrance of the game medium, the main control means acquires the entrance information associated with the entrance by the entrance information acquisition means, and based on the entrance information. The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is dynamically executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means. Instructed to the peripheral control means by the display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed in the display means by the dynamic display execution means. In addition, when the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the mode information indicating the mode of dynamic display corresponding to the received lottery information is stored in the mode information storage unit. Based on the contents of the mode information storage unit stored, whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change possibility determination unit. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Further, for each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the predetermined mode execution means, the dynamic display is executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display is replaced with the dynamic display. A plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner.

  Since the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the execution starts. In the peripheral control means, the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means, so the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is It is possible to change to a predetermined mode during execution of dynamic display. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased. Further, the predetermined mode execution unit causes the dynamic display to be executed following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit to be executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display to be executed subsequently. Instead, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, compared with the case where dynamic display is executed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is changed and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in the predetermined manner. In some cases, the dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be executed one or more times. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of continuously changing the dynamic display mode to the predetermined mode and increase the number of executions of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode.

  In the gaming machine A1, the peripheral control means includes effect information storage means for storing effect information in which effect details of dynamic display executed by the display means are defined, and the predetermined mode execution means is the effect A gaming machine A2 characterized in that a plurality of dynamic displays are executed from the dynamic displays defined by the effect information stored in the information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the peripheral control means stores the effect information in which the contents of the dynamic display effect executed in the display means are stored in the effect information storage means, and the predetermined mode execution means A plurality of dynamic displays are executed from the dynamic displays determined by the effect information. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare special production information and store it in the storage area just to execute a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display changed by the second changing means. Therefore, consumption of the storage area can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the effect information includes dynamic display effect contents that increase the player's expectation and dynamic display effect contents that are different from the dynamic display. The predetermined mode execution unit is configured with the execution time, and the predetermined mode execution unit is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit to execute the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first change unit. And an execution determination unit for determining whether or not each of the plurality of dynamic displays including the dynamic display for enhancing the player's expectation can be executed within the instructed dynamic display execution time, When it is determined that the execution is possible by the execution determination unit, a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation is included instead of the dynamic display that is instructed to execute by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit. Multiple dynamic display it Gaming machine A3, wherein are those to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the production information includes dynamic display production contents that increase the player's expectation and dynamic display production contents that are different from the dynamic display. If the execution of the dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing means is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means of the main control means, the instructed dynamic display is executed. Whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays including a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation can be executed within the time is determined by the execution determination unit. If it is determined that execution is possible, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a plurality of dynamic displays including a dynamic display that increases the player's expectation Each display is executed by predetermined mode execution means. Therefore, instead of the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, a dynamic display that always increases the player's expectation is executed when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation, and moreover, since a plurality of dynamic displays are executed, the contents of the dynamic display can be varied. Therefore, a player is executed when the dynamic display instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed as it is and when a plurality of dynamic displays are executed instead of the instructed dynamic display. Since the level of expectation given to the player can be changed, it is possible to provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, each time the peripheral control means receives the lottery information by the lottery information receiving means, the aspect information indicating the state of the unexecuted dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information, When the execution of dynamic display is instructed by the aspect information storage execution means stored in the aspect information storage means in association with the reception order of the lottery information and the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the execution is instructed. The mode information corresponding to the displayed dynamic display is acquired from the mode information storage unit based on the reception order of the lottery information and the mode information is acquired based on the mode information acquired by the mode information acquisition unit. Execution mode setting means for setting the mode of dynamic display instructed to be executed by the automatic display instruction means, and the predetermined mode execution means is determined to be changeable by the change permission determination means. And a second changing unit that changes each of the unexecuted dynamic display mode information stored in the mode information storage unit to mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Game machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, each time the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the peripheral information control unit stores the mode information indicating the unexecuted dynamic display mode corresponding to the lottery information. If the means is stored in the mode information storage unit in association with the reception order of the lottery information and is determined to be changeable by the change availability determination unit, the mode information of the unexecuted dynamic display stored in the mode information storage unit Are respectively changed by the second changing means to the mode information indicating the predetermined mode. Then, when execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means, the aspect information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed to execute is transmitted from the aspect information storage means based on the reception order of the lottery information. The execution mode setting unit sets the dynamic display mode acquired by the acquisition unit and instructed to be executed by the dynamic display instruction unit based on the mode information. Therefore, when execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instructing means, the mode information corresponding to the dynamic display instructed to execute is simply acquired, and the dynamic instructed to execute based on it is acquired. The display mode can be set. That is, it is necessary to set an appropriate mode by judging the situation such as whether the dynamic display mode is continuously set to a predetermined mode every time execution of dynamic display is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit. Since there is no control burden, the control burden can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A4, if one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit changes or sets the mode information in the mode information storing unit, the other of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit The game machine A5 is characterized in that the mode information is changed or set after the completion.

  According to the gaming machine A5, if one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit is changing or setting the mode information in the mode information storing unit by the other of the second changing unit and the mode information storing executing unit, After that is finished, change or set the mode information. Therefore, while the mode information in the mode information storage unit is being changed or set by one of the second changing unit and the mode information storage executing unit, the mode information being changed or being set is erroneously changed to the second change. It can be prevented from being changed or set by the other of the means and the mode information storage execution means. Therefore, accurate mode information can be stored in the mode information storage means.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the mode of dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display whose mode is changed to the predetermined mode by the second changing unit is limited to a mode different from the predetermined mode. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it includes an aspect limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the mode of the dynamic display executed next to each dynamic display whose mode has been changed to the predetermined mode by the second changing unit is changed to a mode different from the predetermined mode. Limited by. Therefore, when execution of dynamic display is instructed next to each dynamic display whose mode is changed by the second changing unit, the dynamic display is executed in a mode different from the predetermined mode. In addition, while the dynamic display is being executed, even if it is determined that the dynamic display mode being executed by the changeability determination unit can be changed to a predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode being executed is It is executed without change. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display mode from being continuously changed to the predetermined mode after the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode. Can be prevented from continuing continuously.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the main control means obtains information on the number of pieces of entry information stored in the entry information storage means separately from the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that it has a pitch information transmission means for sending to the peripheral control means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the main control means, in addition to the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmission means, information related to the number of pieces of entry information stored in the entry information storage means is input to the peripheral control means. It is transmitted by the number transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the lottery information and the information related to the number of the entry information stored in the entry information storage means, the processing for each information can be executed at different timing. , The control burden can be distributed. Moreover, since the main control means can separately send the lottery information and the information related to the number of entry information stored in the entry information storage means to the peripheral control means, compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing, The control burden can be distributed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. A gaming machine A8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A8, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. The player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and can attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display effect mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine provided with dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information in the event that a game medium has been entered by the detecting means, Entry information acquisition means for acquiring entry information, lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating a lottery result of entry based on the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and the lottery information A mode information storage unit that stores mode information indicating a mode of dynamic display corresponding to the lottery information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a pitch information storage unit that stores the pitch information acquired by the pitch information acquisition unit; The dynamic display executing means includes The dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the content of the incoming ball information storage means, and when the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, the content information of the aspect information storage means If the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode, the changeability determination unit determines whether the change can be changed by the changeability determination unit. First dynamic means for changing the dynamic display mode being executed by the display execution means to the predetermined mode, and each unexecuted dynamic display following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first change means And a predetermined mode executing means for executing the dynamic display in the predetermined mode, or executing a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display in the predetermined mode instead of the dynamic display. Iko Game machine A9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A9, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means. When the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the lottery information indicating the entrance lottery result is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information, and the lottery information corresponding to the lottery information is obtained. The mode information indicating the display mode is stored in the mode information storage unit. Then, based on the contents of the mode information storage unit, the change possibility determination unit determines whether the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit can be changed to a predetermined mode. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. Then, based on the execution time of the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the second changing unit, the execution determination unit determines whether or not a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display whose mode has been changed can be executed. . If it is determined that the execution is possible by the execution determination unit, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the changed dynamic display are executed in a predetermined manner in place of the dynamic display changed by the second changing unit. Executed by means.

  Since the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means, the mode of dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined before the start of the execution. However, since the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing means, the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is changed to the dynamic display. Can be changed to a predetermined mode during execution. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased. Further, the predetermined mode execution unit causes the dynamic display to be executed following the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit to be executed in a predetermined mode, or the dynamic display to be executed subsequently. Instead, a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display can be executed in a predetermined manner. Therefore, compared with the case where dynamic display is executed in a predetermined manner without changing the dynamic display, the dynamic display is changed and a plurality of dynamic displays different from the dynamic display are executed in the predetermined manner. In some cases, the dynamic display of a predetermined mode can be executed one or more times. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of continuously changing the dynamic display mode to the predetermined mode and increase the number of executions of the dynamic display of the predetermined mode.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to games. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entry, the lottery information transmission means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and the entrance information By acquisition means Entry information storage means for storing the acquired entry information, and dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the entry information storage means. The peripheral control means displays a dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information when the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means instructs execution of dynamic display of identification information. Is capable of recognizing the identification information by the dynamic display execution means that is executed on the display means in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display that is executed by the dynamic display execution means. After such a configuration, the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means and the stop display executing means for stopping and displaying the plurality of identification information that are dynamically displayed on the display means are received. When the lottery information is received by the selection information receiving means and the lottery information receiving means, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing means or the plurality of identification information by the dynamic display executing means. If a part of the identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in the difficult recognition manner by the dynamic display executing means. Changeable determination means for determining whether or not it can be changed to a predetermined mode, and when the changeability determination means determines that the change can be made, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the display in a difficult-to-recognition mode. The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode, the stop display of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first change means is terminated, and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information And a second changing means for controlling the predetermined information as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means when executed. B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and based on the entrance information The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically displays the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the dynamic display mode being executed is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, The plurality of pieces of identification information that are dynamically displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display executing means. When the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing unit or by the dynamic display executing unit. When some of the identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means. Whether the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.

  Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display executing means includes a first to nth series of a plurality of pieces of identification information when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. Dynamic display of identification information sequences up to (n is an integer of 2 or more) is executed in the display means in units of identification information sequences, and the same identification information is included in each of the first to nth identification information sequences. If the stop display mode of the identification information is the predetermined mode when the stop display is performed and the stop display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution unit, The first to n-th identification information strings are stopped and displayed for each identification information string in the order of the first to n-th identification information strings, and the changeability determination means is selected by the lottery information reception means. When receiving the dynamic If the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed in a difficult-to-recognize manner by the display execution means, it is determined that the stop display aspect of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined aspect, and the first change means When the change enable / disable determining unit determines that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information sequences dynamically displayed by the dynamic display executing unit is changed to a predetermined mode. A gaming machine B2 that is to be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit, the first to nth (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are connected. The dynamic display executing unit displays the identification information sequence up to the identification information sequence unit by the dynamic display executing unit, and thereafter the first to nth identification information sequences are the first to nth identification information. Stop display is performed by the stop display execution means for each identification information column in the order of the columns. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and stopped, the identification information stop display mode is assumed to be a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the identification information stop display mode Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the changeability determination means. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is executed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Or, even if the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, it is recognized. It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information strings during dynamic display in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Can do. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  It should be noted that the arrangement of the first to nth identification information sequences stopped and displayed in the display areas of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, the identification information columns may be arranged in the vertical direction and arranged side by side in the order, the identification information columns may be arranged in the horizontal direction and arranged in the order in the vertical direction, The information columns may be arranged in an oblique direction, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned on the straight line.

  In the gaming machine B2, the change permission determination means includes identification information determination means for determining whether or not the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the lottery information When the lottery information is received by the receiving means, the identification information determining means determines that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display executing means If the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize aspect, it is determined that the stop display aspect of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined aspect, and the second changing means When it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode. Characteristic gaming machine B3

  According to the gaming machine B3, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the identification information determining unit determines that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. If the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, it is determined by the changeability determination means that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Is done. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings is performed in the order of the first to nth identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When it is executed for each identification information sequence, after each of the first to (n-1) th identification information sequences is stopped and displayed, or in a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. Even if it is dynamically displayed, if it is within the period in which the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the n-th identification information sequence being dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner The mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined manner. It can be a period. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, in the dynamic display of the identification information, the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner, and then the nth identification information sequence is stopped. A first dynamic display capable of executing a change process for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means before the display, and the (n-1) th identification information string. The second dynamic display incapable of executing the changing process by the first changing means after the dynamic display in the recognizable mode until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The dynamic display execution means executes any one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display, and the change possibility determination means has the first to (n) -1) Determine whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information sequence When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings by the identification information determining unit. Then, if the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, it is determined that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. Machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in the dynamic display of the identification information, after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the first changing means and the (n-1) th identification information string in a manner that allows recognition. A second dynamic display in which the change processing by the first changing means cannot be executed during the period from the initial display until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed is provided. Either one of the display and the second dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the change information determination means determines that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, the nth identification information sequence is displayed after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Since the change processing for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means can be executed until the display is stopped, the nth identification information is displayed before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The column identification information can be changed reliably. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information columns is stopped and displayed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be surely changed to a predetermined mode before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the first change means sets the stop display mode of the identification information to the predetermined mode. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, the first change means changes to the stop display mode of the identification information. Can also reduce the control burden.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the game machine includes an array information storage unit that stores array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order, and the one identification information string includes: The stop display execution unit corresponds to the one identification information sequence of the identification information array indicated by the arrangement information, corresponding to a part of the arrangement of the identification information indicated by the arrangement information. A range information storage unit that stores one range information indicating a range of consecutive arrays for each of the first to nth identification information columns is provided, and the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information. After that, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the display means stops and displays each identification information of the identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, array information indicating an array of identification information in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged in a predetermined order is stored in the array information storage means. This corresponds to a part of the continuous arrangement of the identification information shown. In addition, one range information indicating the range of the continuous array corresponding to one identification information string among the array of identification information indicated by the array information is range information storage means for each of the first to nth identification information strings. And after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information of the identification information sequence corresponding to each range information stored in the range information storage means is stopped and displayed on the display means. Stopped by the execution means. Therefore, when identifying each identification information of each of the first to nth identification information strings to be stopped and displayed, one range information indicating the range of the array corresponding to one identification information string is first to first. Since each of the identification information strings up to n can be stored, for each of the first to nth identification information strings, information individually indicating each identification information included in the identification information string and the arrangement of the identification information The amount of information stored in the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where information indicating the order is stored.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the stop display execution means includes identification information acquisition means for acquiring the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means, and the plurality of identification information acquisition means acquired by the plurality of identification information acquisition means. Identification information storage means for storing identification information, and after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, each identification information stored in the identification information storage means is stored in the display means. The first change means, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination means, the dynamic display execution means among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage means The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is changed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the plurality of identification information to be stopped and displayed on the display means is acquired by the identification information acquisition means, the acquired plurality of identification information is stored in the identification information storage means, and the stored plurality of identification information is stored. The identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display execution means after the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. Further, when it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the identification information corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed among the pieces of identification information stored in the identification information storage unit. Then, the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing unit. Therefore, since only the identification information that has not been stopped and displayed can be changed by the first changing means among the plurality of identification information stored in the identification information storage means that is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means, the stop display is executed. The identification information can be changed without affecting the identification information in the middle and the identification information that has been stopped and displayed. Therefore, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode while accurately displaying the stop display of the identification information.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means A dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information composed of a plurality of identification information in the display means in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information, and the dynamic display executing means Stop display executing means for causing the display means to stop and display a plurality of pieces of dynamically displayed identification information after the player has made the aspect in which the player can recognize the identification information as the mode of dynamic display being executed. In the gaming machine having the above, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring the entrance information accompanying the entrance, and the entrance information acquisition means Enter entry information The ball entry information storage means and the dynamic display execution means execute dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, and are acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means. When the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball based on the incoming ball information, If the dynamic display is executed in a recognizable manner by the stop display or the dynamic display execution means, the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed. A changeability determination unit that determines whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode, and the dynamic display execution unit that recognizes the recognition when the changeability determination unit determines that the change can be changed The first change means for changing the stop display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode, and the stop display of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first change unit is terminated, and thereafter And a second changing means for controlling so that the predetermined mode is selected as a stop display mode of the identification information to be stopped and displayed by the stop display executing unit when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means, the dynamic display of the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information is performed by the dynamic display instruction means in the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information. After the execution of the dynamic display mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information items are stopped on the display means. The display execution means stops the display. In addition, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance is acquired by the lottery information acquisition means based on the entrance information, and the lottery information is acquired. In addition, when a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner in which a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information can be recognized by the stop display or the dynamic display execution unit by the stop display execution unit, the dynamic display execution unit By changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize, whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the changeability determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, since the changeable period can be extended, it is possible to increase the chances of making the stop display mode of the identification information a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.

  Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.

  Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of games. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.
In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, when a plurality of variation effects to be started are held when a game ball wins a start opening, this continuous effect is performed for the plurality of change effects that are held (for example, Patent Document 1). : Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383).
However, in order to perform a continuous effect, there are two or more reserved variable effects, so there is a problem that a continuous effect cannot be performed when only one variable effect is reserved.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the chances of performing a continuous performance.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 detects a display means for displaying identification information, a entrance into which a game medium enters, and an entrance of the game medium into the entrance And a peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of the identification information on the display means when the detection means detects the entry of a game medium, and controls the peripheral control means, Main control means for performing various controls, and the main control means obtains the entrance information associated with the entrance when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means Based on the information acquisition means, the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the lottery result of the entrance, and the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means Send to the peripheral control means The lottery information transmitting means, the entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Dynamic display instructing means for instructing the peripheral control means, wherein the peripheral control means has a plurality of identifications when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means. A dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information composed of information in the display means in a manner in which the player is difficult to recognize the identification information, and a dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means After the display mode is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, stop display execution means for stopping and displaying the plurality of identification information displayed dynamically on the display means, and the main control means Extraction When the lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information transmitted by the information transmitting means and the lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information, a part of the plurality of identification information is displayed in a stop or If a part of the plurality of pieces of identification information is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner by the dynamic display executing means, the identification being dynamically displayed in the difficult to recognize manner by the dynamic display executing means A changeability determination unit that determines whether the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode by changing the information, and the dynamic display execution unit when the changeability determination unit determines that the change is possible The first changing unit that changes the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognition mode to a predetermined mode, and the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit Control is performed so that the predetermined mode is selected as the stop display mode of the identification information that is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means when the dynamic display of the subsequent identification information is executed. Second changing means.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the dynamic display execution unit is instructed to execute the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit. The display means executes the dynamic display of the identification information sequence from the first to the n-th (n is an integer equal to or greater than 2) in which a plurality of identification information is connected in the identification information sequence unit. The identification information stop display mode is the predetermined mode when the same identification information is included in each of the identification information strings up to n and the display is stopped, and the stop display execution means is the dynamic display After the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the execution means, the first to nth identification information sequences are stopped and displayed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences, The change permission / inhibition determining means includes the lottery information receiver. When the lottery information is received by the dynamic display executing means, if the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence is executed in the difficult-to-recognize aspect, the stop display aspect of the identification information is set to a predetermined aspect. The first change means determines that the change is possible by the change permission determination means, and the second change to the nth are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means. The stop display mode of the identification information sequence is changed to a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the changeability determination means includes the same identification information in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings. Identification information determination means for determining whether to perform the same, when lottery information is received by the lottery information reception means, the identification information determination means is identical to each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings If the identification information is determined to be present and the dynamic display execution means has executed the dynamic display of the n-th identification information string in the difficult-to-recognize aspect, the stop display aspect of the identification information is set to a predetermined aspect. And when the second change means determines that the change is possible, the second change means determines whether the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the nth identification information string. Change the stop display mode to the specified mode It is intended to.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the (n-1) th identification information string is recognizable in the dynamic display of the identification information. A first dynamic process capable of executing a change process for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing unit between the dynamic display and the stop of the display of the n-th identification information sequence. Display and the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. A second dynamic display incapable of executing the change process, and the dynamic display execution means executes one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display. The change permission / inhibition determining means is configured to display a stop display state of each of the identification information strings from the first to the (n−1) th. Identification information determining means for determining whether or not the same identification information exists, and when the lottery information receiving means receives the lottery information, the identification information determining means performs the first to (n-1) th If it is determined that the same identification information exists in each identification information column and the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. It is determined.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control unit, when the detection unit detects the entrance of the game medium, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition unit. The lottery information indicating the lottery result of the incoming ball based on the incoming ball information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring unit. The acquired lottery information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the lottery information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means Is instructed to the peripheral control means by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, when execution of dynamic display of the identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the player dynamically displays the identification information composed of a plurality of identification information. After the identification information is made to be executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means in a difficult-to-recognize manner, and then the dynamic display mode being executed is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, The plurality of pieces of identification information that are dynamically displayed are stopped and displayed on the display means by the stop display executing means. When the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting unit of the main control unit is received by the lottery information receiving unit, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing unit or by the dynamic display executing unit. When some of the identification information is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display execution means. Whether the mode can be changed to a predetermined mode is determined by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed in a mode that is difficult to be recognized by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Then, when the stop display of the identification information changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means is finished and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the stop of the identification information displayed by the stop display executing means is stopped. Since it is controlled by the second changing unit so that the predetermined mode is selected as the display mode, the stop display mode of the identification information executed by the stop display executing unit is changed to the predetermined mode continuously or intermittently.
Therefore, the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and after that, even after some of the plurality of identification information is stopped and displayed by the stop display execution unit, or the dynamic display execution unit executes the plurality of identification information. Even if a part of the ID is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner, if the identification information is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize by the dynamic display executing means, the dynamic display is performed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. The stop display mode of the identification information inside can be changed to a predetermined mode. Accordingly, not a period in which all of a plurality of pieces of identification information are dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize is set as a period in which the stop display form of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined form. The period that is dynamically displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize can also be a period that can be changed to a predetermined form. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.
Note that examples of the dynamic display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information include a state in which the identification information is moving and displayed (scrolled) at a high speed. In addition, examples of the dynamic display mode in which the player can recognize the identification information include a state where the identification information is moved and displayed (scrolled) at a medium speed or a low speed.
Moreover, the stop display mode is a predetermined mode means that a plurality of pieces of identification information to be stopped and displayed includes predetermined identification information, or predetermined identification information is regularly included. This is exemplified.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, identification information sequences from the first to the nth (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected. Are displayed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means in units of identification information strings, and then the first to nth identification information strings are arranged in the order of the first to nth identification information strings. Each identification information string is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing means. Here, when the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and stopped, the identification information stop display mode is assumed to be a predetermined mode. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information sequence in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the identification information stop display mode Is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the changeability determination means. Here, if it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the second to n-th identification information strings that are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. . Therefore, when the stop display of the identification information is executed for each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences by the stop display execution means, even after the first identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Or, even if the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner by the dynamic display execution means, if the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize It is possible to change the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information strings during dynamic display in a difficult mode to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the second identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner is also a period that can be changed to a predetermined manner. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.
It should be noted that the arrangement of the first to nth identification information sequences stopped and displayed in the display areas of the display means may be any arrangement. For example, the identification information columns may be arranged in the vertical direction and arranged side by side in the order, the identification information columns may be arranged in the horizontal direction and arranged in the order in the vertical direction, The information columns may be arranged in an oblique direction, arranged in parallel and shifted in order. Moreover, each identification information row | line | column may be arrange | positioned on the straight line.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving unit, the first to (n-1) th If the identification information determining means determines that the same identification information exists in each of the identification information strings, and if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the nth identification information string in a manner that is difficult to recognize, the identification information The stop display mode of information is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode by the change permission determination unit. Here, when it is determined that the change is possible, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Therefore, the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n−1) th identification information strings is performed in the order of the first to nth identification information strings by the stop display execution means. When it is executed for each identification information sequence, after each of the first to (n-1) th identification information sequences is stopped and displayed, or in a mode in which the (n-1) th identification information sequence can be recognized. Even if it is dynamically displayed, if it is within the period in which the nth identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize manner, stop display of the n-th identification information sequence being dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize manner The mode can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, only the period in which all the first to nth identification information strings are dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize aspect is not a period in which the identification information stop-display aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect. The period from when the first identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner to before the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner can also be changed to a predetermined manner. It can be a period. Therefore, there is an effect that the opportunity to change the stop display mode of the identification information to a predetermined mode continuously or intermittently can be increased as much as the changeable period can be extended.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the following effect is obtained. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information includes the first time from when the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The first dynamic display capable of executing the changing process for changing the identification information dynamically displayed by the changing means and the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. There are provided a second dynamic display incapable of executing the changing process by the first changing means until the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, and the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display are provided. Any one of the dynamic displays is executed by the dynamic display executing means. Then, when the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determining means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic display is executed. If the first dynamic display is executed by the means, the change information determination means determines that the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined mode. When the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, the nth identification information sequence is displayed after the (n-1) th identification information sequence is dynamically displayed in a recognizable manner. Since the change processing for changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed by the first changing means can be executed until the display is stopped, the nth identification information is displayed before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. The column identification information can be changed reliably. Therefore, the first dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the stop display of the identification information in which the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information columns is stopped and displayed. When executed by the means, the stop display mode of the identification information can be surely changed to a predetermined mode before the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. Therefore, only when the stop display mode of the identification information can be reliably changed to the predetermined mode before the n-th identification information sequence is stopped and displayed, the first change means sets the stop display mode of the identification information to the predetermined mode. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the stop display mode of the identification information can be changed before the n-th identification information string is stopped and displayed, the first change means changes to the stop display mode of the identification information. Has the effect of reducing the control burden.

10 Pachinko machines (examples of game machines)
64 1st entrance (an example of entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (an example of display means)
110 Main control device (an example of main control means)
117 Production control device (an example of peripheral control means)
203a Reservation ball storage area (an example of entrance information storage means)
208a First entrance switch (an example of detection means)
S306 An example of dynamic display instruction means S654 An example of entrance information acquisition means S655 An example of lottery information acquisition means S656 An example of lottery information transmission means S1104 An example of dynamic display execution means S1107 to S1112, S1605, S1107 to S1112, S1706 An example of availability determination means S1110 An example of identification information determination means S1311 An example of stop display execution means S1401 An example of lottery information reception means S1606 An example of first change means S1608, S2111, S2113, S1708, S2111, S2113 An example of second change means

Claims (4)

Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game,
The main control means includes
When the detection means detects a game medium entry, the entry information acquisition means for acquiring entry information associated with the entry;
Based on the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, lottery information acquisition means for acquiring the lottery information indicating the entrance lottery result;
Lottery information transmitting means for transmitting the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquiring means to the peripheral control means;
Entry information storage means for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means;
Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the entry information storage means,
The peripheral control means includes
When execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction unit of the main control unit, it is difficult for the player to recognize the identification information dynamically by displaying the identification information composed of a plurality of pieces of identification information. Dynamic display executing means for executing in the display means in such a manner;
After the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a mode in which the player can recognize the identification information, the plurality of dynamically displayed identification information items are stopped on the display unit. Stop display execution means to be displayed;
Lottery information receiving means for receiving the lottery information transmitted by the lottery information transmitting means of the main control means;
When lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, a part of the plurality of identification information is stopped by the stop display executing means or a part of the plurality of identification information is recognized by the dynamic display executing means. If it is dynamically displayed in a possible manner, the stop display mode of the identification information is changed to a predetermined mode by changing the identification information that is dynamically displayed in the difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit. A changeability determination means for determining whether it is possible;
A first change that changes the stop display mode of identification information that is dynamically displayed in a difficult-to-recognize mode by the dynamic display execution unit to a predetermined mode when it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit. Means,
The stop display mode of the identification information that is stopped and displayed by the stop display executing unit when the stop display of the identification information whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit ends and the subsequent dynamic display of the identification information is executed. And a second changing means for controlling the predetermined mode to be selected. The dynamic display executing means includes
When the execution of dynamic display of identification information is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the first to nth identification information sequences (n is an integer of 2 or more) in which a plurality of identification information are connected. In the display means in units of identification information strings,
When the same identification information is included in each of the first to n-th identification information strings and stopped, the stop display mode of the identification information is the predetermined mode,
The stop display executing means includes
After the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, the first to nth identification information sequences are assigned to each identification information sequence in the order of the first to nth identification information sequences. Stop display,
The change permission determination means includes
When the lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, if the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the second identification information string in the difficult-to-recognize manner, the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is determined that the aspect can be changed to a predetermined aspect,
The first changing means includes
When it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the stop display mode of the second to nth identification information sequences dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a thing. The change permission determination means includes
Identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings,
When lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determination means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic information If the dynamic display of the n-th identification information sequence is executed in a difficult-to-recognition manner by the display execution means, it is determined that the stop display manner of the identification information can be changed to a predetermined manner,
The second changing means includes
When it is determined that the change is possible by the change permission determination unit, the stop display mode of the n-th identification information sequence dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to claim 2. For dynamic display of the identification information,
The first changing unit dynamically displays the (n-1) th identification information sequence in a recognizable manner until the nth identification information sequence is stopped and displayed. First dynamic display capable of executing change processing for changing the identification information, and the nth identification after the (n-1) th identification information string is dynamically displayed in the recognizable manner. A second dynamic display incapable of executing the changing process by the first changing means until the information string is stopped and displayed;
The dynamic display executing means includes
Performing one of the first dynamic display and the second dynamic display;
The change permission determination means includes
Identification information determination means for determining whether the same identification information exists in the stop display mode of each identification information sequence from the first to the (n-1) th,
When lottery information is received by the lottery information receiving means, it is determined by the identification information determination means that the same identification information exists in each of the first to (n-1) th identification information strings, and the dynamic information The game according to claim 2 or 3, wherein if the first dynamic display is executed by the display execution means, the stop display mode of the identification information is determined to be changeable to a predetermined mode. Machine.

Images